JP2016154805A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine including a control part, the control part comprises: start storage means (a game control device 100) which can store start storage on the basis of entry of game balls into a start winning port; and prior determination means which performs prior determination of a result of a variable display game prior to start of the variable display game on the basis of the start storage. The control part also comprises: prior performance control means executing performance based on the prior determination result of the prior determination means; and specific game state generation means capable of generating a specific game state advantageous to a player for a prescribed period after the end of the special game state. The special result includes a first special result (big winning) capable of generating a first special game state and a second special result (small winning) capable of generating a second special game state lower in game value that can be imparted to a player than the first special game state. The prior performance control means can execute a prescribed performance on the basis of the prior determination result of the prior determination means in the second special game state generated in the case that the second special game state occurs in the specific game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

  The present invention closes the variable winning device when a special result is derived as a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening provided in the game area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state that can be converted from an open state to an open state to give a player a gaming value.

  In a conventional gaming machine, based on the result of the variable display game, a first profit that opens the ball winning means (attacker device) in a predetermined manner and sets the probability state to a high probability state, and the ball winning means (attacker device) ) Is released in an open mode in which the value that can be acquired is lower than the open mode in the first profit and the probability state is set to a high probability state, and the ball winning means (attacker device) is set to the second It is possible to generate a third profit that is opened in an open mode that is the same as or approximated to the profit and that does not shift the probability state, and a game that occurs when the second profit occurs and when the third profit occurs A gaming machine that is difficult for a person to identify is provided (see, for example, Patent Document 1). At present, the profit corresponding to the third profit as described above is mainly referred to as “small hit”.

JP 2006-14845 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the interest of the game could not be enhanced.
Therefore, the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
When a special result is derived as a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state that can be converted to give a player a gaming value,
The control means includes
Starting memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on a winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the result of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start storage means;
Game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means;
Based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination unit, a pre-production control unit capable of performing a predetermined production;
A specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the variable display game is executed to be advantageous to the player over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state;
With
The special result includes a first special result capable of generating a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state capable of generating a second special gaming state having a gaming value lower than that of the first special gaming state. With special results,
The specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game in the specific game state is the first special result than the normal state,
The pre-production control means is
When the second special gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform the predetermined effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means in the generated second special gaming state. It is characterized by.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The start prize opening includes a first start prize opening and a second start prize opening,
A first start storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A second starting storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
The second special result can be derived even in the variation display game based on the start memory stored by either the first start memory means or the second start memory means.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining a hit probability and a hit kind. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal chart end process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the usual chart normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect button input process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting advance notice setting process. It is a figure explaining the content of the notice during a small hit. It is a figure explaining the display in a specific game state. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus in a small hit game state. It is a figure explaining an example of a notice during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of increase promotion information. It is a figure explaining an example of a notice during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of a notice during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of a notice during a small hit. It is a figure explaining the example of arrangement | positioning of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure explaining an example of a screen shot function. It is a figure explaining player setting mode. It is a figure explaining hole setting mode. It is a flowchart explaining a screen shot process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall | game player setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall demonstration effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a player volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a player LED brightness | luminance adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a screen shot setting process. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display device. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of 2nd Embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an abnormal change notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the variation mode of the effect design. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an effect lottery process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the game number display part in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with the display apparatus in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with the display apparatus in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening switch monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation alerting | reporting in a 3rd modification is performed. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the collective display apparatus in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining interruption of the special figure change display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus and special figure indicator at the time of being interrupted in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus and special figure indicator at the time of being interrupted in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hits end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hits end process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with a special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of the game state in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the probability information command in a 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in a 6th modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a discharge abnormality notification lamp (LED) 17 are provided above the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect operation unit 700 that receives an operation input from the player is provided at the upper edge of the upper plate 21. This effect operation unit 700 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for accepting a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (press surface) of the effect button 25 is contacted by the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect operation unit 300, in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect in which the player's operation is performed is performed. Can do.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the right part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 has a quadrangular prism shape and is rotatable about an axis along the length direction.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (common symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the normal variation display game. The game ball that has won the normal start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7). Further, a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the left and below the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

  Furthermore, a special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted or a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged on the left portion of the center case 40 in the game area 32. It is installed. The special variation winning device 38 has a movable member on the game area 32 side, and the movable member becomes almost vertical depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (the player is closed). From a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player) that can accept a game ball that is inclined to the left and flows down the game area 32.

  That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by a movable member that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and has a special gaming state (first special gaming state). ) In the middle or small hit game state (second special game state), it is possible to facilitate the influx of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

  Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display that give start conditions for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning port 97 (start winning port, start winning area) for providing a game (special figure 2 variable display game) start condition is provided. The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 (see FIG. 6). . A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a, and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is a start opening 2 switch 97a (see FIG. 7). ).

  Also, on the left side of the winning device 90, there is provided an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure two variable display game). ing. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the general variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation prize winning device 37 by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 7) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by a start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7) that forms the start port 2 switch 2. Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

  FIG. 3 shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the winning device 90. As shown in FIG. 3A, a distribution member 92 is provided inside the winning device 90 at a position directly below the inflow port 91. In addition, a first start winning opening 36 is disposed on the lower left side of the distributing member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is disposed on the lower right side of the distributing member. Further, a cover member 93 is provided so as to cover the front of the sorting member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 97. The cover member 93 is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

  The distribution member 92 is an inverted T-shaped member that can rotate around a rotation shaft 92a along the front-rear direction. Of the three arm portions extending from the position where the rotation shaft 92a is arranged, on the left side of the arm portion 92b extending upward, there is an arm portion 92c extending to the left adjacent to the arm portion 92b. To form a first holding portion 92e for temporarily holding a game ball, and an arm portion 92d extending rightward adjacent to the arm portion 92b is provided on the right side of the arm portion 92b extending upward. A second holding portion 92f that temporarily holds the game ball is formed. In this sorting member 92, the first holding portion 92e can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 91 as shown in FIG. 3A with the arm portion 92b extending upward always facing upward. As shown by a solid line in FIG. 3B, the second holding portion 92f can rotate between a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first holding portion 92 e is in a position where it can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91, the second holding portion 92 f faces the second start winning opening 97. It will be in the state where it was made to flow down. Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the second holding portion 92 f is in a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 can be received, the first holding portion 92 e faces the first start winning award 36. The game ball is brought down.

  The arm portion 92b extending upward is provided with a first magnet 92g, and the winning device 90 that faces the first magnet 92g when the arm portion 92b extending upward is vertical. A second magnet 94 is provided on the rear wall. The first magnet 92g and the second magnet 94 are arranged so that the opposite poles are the same pole, and the arm 92b extending upward by the repulsive force does not stay in a vertical state, but left and right. It is urged | biased so that it may rotate to either. As a result, in a state in which the rotation of the sorting member 92 is stopped, either the first holding portion 92e or the second holding portion 92f is in a state in which the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 can be received.

  In such a winning apparatus 90, as shown in FIG. 3B, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 can be received toward the inflow port 91 of the first holding unit 92e and the second holding unit 92f. It is held by one holding part that is in a state. When the game ball is held by one holding portion, the sorting member 92 is rotated in the direction of the holding portion by the weight of the game ball, and the held game ball is in the direction in which the holding portion is rotated. It flows down toward the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the game ball that has flowed in by the first holding portion 92e is received, the sorting member 92 is rotated to the left by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. Then, as shown in FIG. 3B, the second holding portion 92g stops in a state where it can receive the next game ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in by the second holding portion 92f is received, the sorting member 92 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball and moves to the second start winning opening 97. Then, as shown in FIG. 3A, the first holding portion 92e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received.

  The game ball that has flowed down from the holding portion is likely to flow into the first start winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97, but may not flow. If it does not flow, it will flow out of the winning device 90. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding unit is strong, there is a high possibility that the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97 will not flow. In addition, you may comprise so that it may always win in any start winning opening.

  In addition, when the sorting member 92 is rotated, the other holding portion that is not the holding portion where the game ball is held can be received toward the inflow port 91. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding part side. Thereby, the game balls that sequentially flow into the inflow port 91 are alternately distributed to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97.

  Further, an ordinary variation winning device 37 is provided on the left side of the winning device 90 so that a game ball that has not won the first start winning opening 36 may win the ordinary variation winning device 37. ing. In addition, a general winning opening 35 is provided on the right side of the winning device 90 so that a game ball that has not won the second starting winning opening 97 may win the general winning opening 35. . In addition, at the position to the left of the winning device 90 and to the upper right of the normal variation winning device 37, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down from the left of the normal variation winning device 37 is directed to the normal varying winning device 37. A guiding unit 98 is provided for changing the above.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), a first special figure fluctuation display game, a second special figure fluctuation display game, and a general There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning at the figure start gate 34 and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display section) for a first special figure fluctuation display game constituted by a seven-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. ) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation display for the normal figure fluctuation display game constituted by the LED lamp. Part (common figure display) 53 (D8, D10, D18), and memory display parts 54, 55, 56 (D11 to D16) for notifying the start memory number of each variable display game similarly configured by LED lamps. Prepare.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a short-time state occurs, and turns on to notify the occurrence of the short-time state (second gaming state display unit, short-time state notification unit) 58 (D17), the gaming machine 10 The third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 59 (D9) for displaying that the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot ( Round display units 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38 are provided. The collective display device 50 is further lit when a big hit occurs, and a display unit (display) that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, or that the game state is advantageous in that the right hit is more advantageous than the left hit. A display unit (right-handed notification unit) or the like may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the game result is out of the lamps D8, D10, and D18 constituting the universal display 53, only the lamp D8 is turned on. When the game result is a win and the stop symbol number is "1", only the lamp D10 is lit. When the game result is a hit and the stop symbol number is "2", only the lamp D18 is lit. When the game result is a win and the stop symbol number is “3”, the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  In addition, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 53 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the number of reservations is “0” among the lamps D15 and D16 constituting the general-purpose hold indicator 56, both the lamps D15 and D16 are turned on. When the hold number is “1”, only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the hold number is “2”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on, and when the hold number is “3”. Is configured such that the lamp D15 is blinked and the lamp D16 is lit, and both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are blinked when the holding number is “4”.

  The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 indicates the number of first start memories (special figure 1 hold) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), among the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, when the special figure 1 start memory number is “0”, the lamp D11 and Both lamps D12 are turned off. When the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D11 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp D11 is blinked and the lamp D12 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "4", the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Both are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The special figure 2 hold display 55 indicates the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, when the special figure 2 start memory number is “0” among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 holding display 55, the lamp D13 and Both lamps D14 are turned off. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D13 is turned on. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are set. Is turned on, and when the special figure 2 starting memory number is "3", the lamp D13 is blinked and the lamp D14 is turned on. When the special figure 2 starting memory number is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Both are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The second gaming state display unit (time-short state notifying unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. When the function is not activated, the lamp is turned off, and when the time-short state occurs (when the variable time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state based on the big hit is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, it corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Set the lamp to light up. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4G, among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 60, when the selected number of rounds is “16”, the lamps D5 to D7 are turned on. The lamps D4 to D6 are turned on when the selected number of rounds is “8”, and the lamp D3 is turned on when the selected number of rounds is “2”. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display. The configuration of the collective display device 50 may be configured as shown in a fifth modification of the second embodiment to be described later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a display of a fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41, and start memory An information display device 800 for displaying numbers is provided.

  As shown to Fig.5 (a), the information display apparatus 800 is comprised by L1-L6 which is six LED located in a line. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), L1 is a special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the first special diagram variation display game. L2 is a special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the second special symbol variation display game. L3 and L4 are special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the first start memory number, and L5 and L6 are special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the second start memory number.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (c), at L1 and L2, while the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game is changing, the LED is blinked to indicate that the game is changing. The game result is displayed as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the result. In the case of this embodiment, when it is off, it is turned off, and when it is a big hit or a small hit, it is turned on. Note that the display mode in the case of the small hit may be different from the display mode different from the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in the fluctuation | variation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (d), L3 and L4 are stored in the first start memory (the special figure 1 hold) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. The number is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 1 start memory number is “0”, both L3 and L4 are turned off, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is “1”, only L3 is lit. FIG. 1 When the starting memory number is “2”, both L3 and L4 are lit. When the starting memory number is “3”, L3 is blinking and L4 is lit. When the start memory number is “4”, both L3 and L4 are in a blinking state. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5D, L5 and L6 are stored in the second start memory (the special figure 2 hold) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. The number is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 2 start memory number is “0”, both L5 and L6 are turned off, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is “1”, only L5 is lit. FIG. 2 When the starting memory number is “2”, both L5 and L6 are turned on. When the starting memory number is “3”, L5 is blinked and L6 is turned on. When the start memory number is “4”, both L5 and L6 are in a blinking state. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example.

  Note that the brightness of the information display device 800 may be adjusted so that the game is not affected. For example, when the information display device 800 is provided in the vicinity of the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, there arises a problem that it becomes difficult to see a game ball flowing in due to light emission. In order to solve such a problem, the luminance of the information display device 800 may be adjusted. As a method for adjusting the brightness, there are a method for decreasing the value of the current flowing through the LED by resistance, a method for adjusting by software control such as PWM control, a method using these in combination, and the like.

  By providing the information display device 800 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 can be effectively utilized without occupying the display area of the display device 41 by displaying the fourth symbol. When a movable effect member or the like is provided, the information display device 800 is placed at a position that does not fall within the operation range of the movable effect member so that the information display device 800 is not covered during the operation. Deploy. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed not on the information display device 800 but on the display device 41. In this case, the fourth symbol is displayed at a position that is not concealed by the effect member or the like so that it can always be seen. In addition, when a movable effect member or the like is provided, it is displayed at a position that does not fall within the operation range of the movable effect member or the movable effect so that the fourth pattern is not covered during the operation. According to the operation of the member, it can be visually recognized by moving to a position that does not fall within the operating range.

  FIG. 6 shows details of the effect operation unit 700. FIG. 6A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the effect operation unit 700 of the present embodiment includes an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. Has been. That is, the rendering operation unit 700 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to a physical push button function.

  Sensitivity setting data, LED luminance data, and the like are transmitted from the production control board (production control device) 300 to the production operation unit 700, and a production button is sent from the production operation unit 700 to the production control board (production control device) 300. A push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the (push button) 25 and a touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a provided in the touch panel 29 are output. It is configured to be.

  In the case of the present embodiment, an operation button switch (push sensor) 25 a included in the effect button (push button) 25 is used to press the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 (an operation of pressing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 to depress the effect operation unit 700. ) Is detected. In addition, a plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 700, and a touch operation with respect to the points provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 700 is detected by a touch sensor included in the touch panel 29.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B, nine points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” points are provided as a plurality of points. More specifically, the “TSW4” point provided in the center of the top surface of the production operation unit 700, the “TSW1” point provided on the left side of the “TSW4” point, and the back side from the “TSW4” point (game "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side), "TSW6" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point, and "TSW8" provided on the near side (player side) from the "TSW4" point Point, “TSW2” point provided between “TSW1” point and “TSW3” point, “TSW5” point provided between “TSW3” point and “TSW6” point, and “TSW6” Between the “TSW7” point provided between the points and the “TSW8” point, and between the “TSW8” point and the “TSW1” point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. In FIG. 6B, for convenience, the points “TSW1” to “TSW8” are indicated as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, respectively. However, in the effect operation unit 700 of this embodiment, FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  There are eight points from “TSW1” to “TSW8” that can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29, and no contact operation is detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the contact operation may be detected also at the “Pa” point. In addition, each of the nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” point has an independent LED system (in the present embodiment, a full color LED).

  The “Pa” point is, for example, that the LED of the “Pa” point is used as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or the LED of each point on the top surface of the production operation unit 700 is turned on sequentially like a roulette. Can be used for deterministic effects, such as using the LED at the “accurate (or probability change confirmation)” point, or using the LED at the “Pa” point for a certain effect of prefetching.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LEDs for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 (specifically, the LEDs arranged at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, the “Pa” points, etc.) is adjusted by brightness adjustment (hole setting). , And player adjustments) are excluded. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor forcibly turns off the touch when the touch-on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)) (stops the output of the touch-on signal and turns off the touch. Signal output function). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured not to detect a continuous contact operation for a predetermined time or longer.

  An example of the player's operation detected by such an effect operation unit 700 is an operation shown in FIG. 6C. “Single stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 700 is pressed once, and “continuous stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 700 is pressed several times at intervals within a predetermined time. “Long press” is an operation in which the effect operation unit 700 is kept pressed for a predetermined time or more, and “touch” is an operation to touch the touch panel 29. “Pa” operation (TSW1or8) + long press ”is long in a state in which one (or both) of the“ Pa ”point or two adjacent points“ TSW1 ”and“ TSW8 ”is touched. “Flick” is an operation of sliding to touch the touch panel 29 and play it. Of course, the operation to detect is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning balls to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a provided therein. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four), A game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball in the second special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is limited as the second start memory. Is remembered. Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40 and the information display device 800, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is configured to display the special figure 1 indicator 51 (variable display device) or the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 based on the winning or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure fluctuation display game is played on the special figure 2 display 52 (fluctuation display device). The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 800 is also a special result mode. Further, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the small hit result mode as a result of the special figure change display game, a small hit game state (so-called so-called game condition) , A small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 800 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest. In the information display device 800, as described above, the decorative special figure variation display game is executed using L1 and L2.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second start winning opening) in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0. 37 and the normal variation winning device 37), the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first characteristic is immediately based on the start memory. A figure change display game (second special figure change display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball wins the first start winning port 36 (or the second starting winning port 37 or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state where the game is not played, in a special game state or in a small hit game state, the game starts. If the number of memories is less than the upper limit number, the starting memory number is incremented by 1, and one starting memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the gate switch. 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, and a large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state (short-time operation state (general power support state)), the starting memory number, etc., any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables Select and obtain the fluctuation pattern table. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 97, and a normal variation winning device. 37, start port 2 switches 37a and 97a (start port 2 switches 1 and 2), a gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a special winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. ing. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Is done. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the information display device 800 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display device, a process for displaying the universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general diagram display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated. The movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display is stored. A game jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switches 37a, 97a provided in the second start winning port 97 and the normal variation winning device 37, and the second memory is stored based on the start memory. The random number value for determining the big hit of the special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the winning deviation of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 and the information display device 800 perform a process of displaying a decoration special map variation display game corresponding to the special map variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, for example, the CPU 111A can open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable prize device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. Control is performed. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (specific game state) as the game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the low probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets a short time state (also referred to as a specific game state, a general figure high probability state, or a general electric power support state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to generate. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per symbol (opening time of the main power), and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  FIG. 9 shows the probability of winning and the type of winning. As shown in FIG. 9A, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. This small hit probability does not change regardless of the state of the big hit probability.

  FIG. 9B shows the winning types, the average number of winning prize balls and the distribution probability for each winning type. The big hit types include 16R probability variation A to F, 6R probability variation, 2R probability variation A and B. The 16R probability variation A to F has 16 rounds that can be executed in the special game state, but the contents of the effects and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in each round are different. In addition, the 2R probability variation A and B are two rounds that can be executed in the special game state, but the contents of the effects are different.

  In addition, after the special game state based on the big hit, the high-probability state (specific game state) is maintained over a period until a predetermined number of times (here, 80 times) the special figure variation display game is executed. Therefore, any big hit type is a probable big hit. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the variable display game is executed for the player for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. Of course, it may include a normal jackpot which is a low probability state after the special gaming state is finished. In the case of 16R probability variation A to F, 6R probability variation, and 2R probability variation A, a normal variation winning device is provided for a period of time until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 80 times) after the special game state is finished. The operation state 37 becomes the short-time operation state. In the case of 2R probability variation A, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 becomes the normal operation state after the special game state is ended.

  The operation modes of the special variable winning device 38 in each round include long opening and short opening. In the long opening, the openable time is 29 seconds, and in the short opening, the openable time is 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the more rounds that are open, the greater the number of winning balls. The 16R probability variation A, B, F is long open in any round. Therefore, it is also a big hit of 16 rounds (actual 16R). These differ in the content of the production. Further, the 16R probability variation C is long open until 12 rounds, and short open between 13 and 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said to be a big hit of 12 rounds (actual 12R). Further, the 16R probability variation D is long open until 8 rounds, and short open between 9 and 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said to be a big hit of 8 rounds (actual 8R). Further, the 16R probability variation E is long open until 4 rounds, and short open between 5 and 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said to be a big hit of 4 rounds (actual 4R). In addition, the 6R probability variation is long open in any round, and the 2R probability variation A and B is short open in any round. In the case of small hits, the short opening of 0.2 seconds is performed twice as in the case of 2R probability variation A and B.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 11, and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 11 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 11, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is saved. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shuts down. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed.

  Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a are monitored, the whole process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winnings of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, A game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on a prize in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning prize switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process when the small hit occurs A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, the start port 1 switch), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is loaded. Information indicating that there has been a prize is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A106 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first starting port (step A103; Y), a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) is set. After the preparation (step A104), the special figure start port switch common process (step A105) is performed.

Next, a second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A106), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A107) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 2 switch in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, Information indicating that there has been a prize is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting port (step A108).
If it is determined in step A108 that there is no winning at the second starting port (step A108; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A108 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A108; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A109), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A109; Y), a step is performed. The process proceeds to A111, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A109 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A109; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A110).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A110 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A110; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (second starting winning port 97, ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared. After (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (step A112) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step A110 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A110; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more. In the case of winning the second start winning opening 97, the processing of steps A111 and A112 may be performed without performing the processing of steps A109 and A110.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A105 and A112) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a is obtained from the gaming machine The start port signal output count that is the number of outputs to 10 external management devices is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A132). Step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). ). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing of steps A102 and A107 is used as the big hit of the RWM. Save in the random number storage area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A142), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143). Further, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A144), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A145) is performed.
Then, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A146), and an effect command setting process (step A147) is performed to perform a special figure start opening switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37. And a starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting storage serving as the right to execute the variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) performs a first start with various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (first starting winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. As a second start-up memory, various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening (second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning device 37) are stored as memories, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Remember.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A145) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 16, first, a big hit determination process (step A151) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A152; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A153) and corresponds to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A160.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A152; N), a small hit determination process (step A155) is performed for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. Do. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A156; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A159), and the process proceeds to step A160.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A156; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A157), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 is displayed. (Step A158), and the process proceeds to step A160.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A160), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A161). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A162) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S162). A163).

  Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A165), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A162 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A163 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit, a small hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is used as the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before that, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game It is possible to notify the result related information.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting middle processing is being performed (step A203). ).
When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.
Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207) and an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes exceeds an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step). A218).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). When it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when under middle hit processing (step A221; Y), the big win mouth control pointer area is small hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding number, which is a value obtained by adding the first start memory number and the second start memory number, is 0 (step A301). That is, it is determined whether there is a start memory.

If the special figure hold number is not 0 (step A301; N), that is, if there is a start memory, it is determined whether the start memory to be processed this time is the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) (step A302). ).
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, so that the start memory to be processed this time, which is the start memory for starting the special figure variation display game, is the first start. It is determined whether it is the memory or the second start memory, and the process for the corresponding special figure variation display game is performed.

  When the start memory to be processed this time is special figure 1 hold (first start memory) (step A302; Y), special figure 1 variation start processing (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 1 hold number is handled. A decoration special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and an effect command setting process (step A305) is performed. Then, the special-figure changing process transition setting process (step A306) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special-figure ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the start memory to be processed this time is not the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) (step A302; N), that is, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory), the special figure 2 fluctuation start Processing (step A307) is performed to prepare a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is executed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

If the special figure hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), that is, if there is no start memory, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not started. In the case (step A311; N), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A303) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19, first, a special figure fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A process for setting deviation information and jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit, and a small number for determining whether or not the first special figure variable display game is a jackpot. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) for performing a process of setting shift information and small hit information for the hit flag is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 20, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A process for setting shift information and jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot, and a small for determining whether or not the second special figure variable display game is a jackpot. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting a shift information and a small hit information for the hit flag.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  In addition, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (first starting winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (first Based on the detection of the game ball at the 2 start winning opening 97 and the normal variation winning device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is decided that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 big hit) starts (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round of the RWM Save in the number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a lottery (a so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability variation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games to be in a high probability state ( Step A726), the effect mode information check process (step A727) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed.

Then, a special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and an effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), a high probability variation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games to be in a high probability state. (Step A735), an effect mode information check process (Step A736) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (Step A737), and the remaining effect rotation speed and the remaining switching preparation It is determined whether the rotational speed matches (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, an effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the big winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is acquired opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907). A process for setting a transition to a process for opening a special prize opening (step A909) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval is terminated.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long open big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A908). Then, a process transition setting process (step A909) during the special winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004).

  If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening is being opened. End the process.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is executed, and the big prize opening opening process is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special gaming state is completed. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of preparation (step A1009), performing an effect command setting process (step A1010), performing a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move on to processing. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. When the big hit type is 16R probability variation B to F (see FIG. 9), the production from the start of the special game state to the final round in the long open is a common production, and the final round in the long open In a round that is likely to be, a round continuation notification effect is provided for notifying whether or not the long open will continue in the next round in the interval period after the special figure variable prize winning device 38 is closed. That is, the round continuation notification effect is performed in the interval periods of 4R, 8R, and 12R.

  For example, from 1R to 4R, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the round continuation notification effect is executed in the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 is closed at the 4Rth time. In the case of 16R probability variation B to D, F, round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened with a long opening even in the fifth and subsequent rounds. Further, if the probability is 16R probability change E, the non-continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect (rank down effect), and the big winning opening is opened with a short opening in the fifth and subsequent rounds.

  After that, in 16R probability variation B to D, F, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 5R to 8R, and the round continues in the interval period after the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed at the 8th eye. The notification effect is executed. If it is 16R probability variation B, C, F, round continuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened with a long opening even in the 9th round and subsequent rounds. Further, if it is 16R probability variation D, the round non-continuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the grand prize winning opening is opened with a short opening in the rounds after the 9R.

  Furthermore, in 16R probability variation B, C, F, from 9R to 12R, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the round continues in the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 is closed at the 12th eye. The notification effect is executed. In the case of 16R probability variation B and F, the round continuation notification effect is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened with a long opening even in the 13th and subsequent rounds. In the case of 16R probability variation C, a round discontinuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened in a short open in the 13th and subsequent rounds.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 4, 8, 12R) (step S1106; Y). A1107).
When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. To do.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), setting the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the winning prize opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in this jackpot ending process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is the short time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state), and therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / short time / direction mode A”, “high probability / short time / direction mode B”. , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and a special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1216). End the termination process.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the small hit fanfare middle process, a small hit medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28B, in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” relating to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the small hit middle processing, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), a command for the small hitting end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process ends.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability ( Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1616.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag save area is loaded with a flag (step A1616), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1617) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15) ) To complete the usual game process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of common map holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common map holds is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B102). ).

  If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B105), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B106), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary fluctuation winning display device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations with the ordinary figure fluctuation display game in the winning state. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, when it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value of the action end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal game (step B205), the normal game process timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general power prize switch monitoring process is performed. finish. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

  Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the usual-day routine processing, first, it is determined whether the number of usual-pending holds is “0” (step B301). If the number of usual-pending holds is “0” (step B201; Y) ) Performs the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B322), and ends the normal figure normal process. If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) ( In step B302), the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability that the winning result is normal in the usual figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the probability of the usual figure set higher than the probability (that is, the ordinary figure low probability) is high, that is, whether the state is in the short time state (step B304).

When the usual figure is not in high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the usual figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the usual figure is in high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), In the area, the slip information is saved (step B309), the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B310), the slipping symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step B311), and the stop symbol number is temporarily stopped. Save to the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the hit loaded in step B302 A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol number. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”.
Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step 315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the normal time change time corresponding to the normal game mode state is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B317). Here, 700 ms is set as the normal time fluctuation time when the normal figure probability is low, and 500 ms is set as the normal time fluctuation time when the normal figure probability is high. Then, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B318), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B319), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B320). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this process, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area 2 for the general map is moved from the value for the number of reserved general charts 4 to the number of the reserved number of random numbers in the random number storage area for the general map 1 Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B321) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B511) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), it is determined whether or not the power transmission is being supported (normal probability is high) (step B504).

  Then, when the power transmission is being supported (in the high probability of the normal figure) (step B504; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B505), and the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is set. A value (for example, “0”, “2”, or “4”) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B506). Next, a normal power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B507). After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B210) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not during normal power support (normal probability is high) (step B504; N), a normal start hit value (for example, “4” because it is opened once) is set, Save in the control pointer area (step B508). Next, a normal power open time (for example, 100 ms regardless of the type of winning symbol) is set and saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B509). After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B210) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during the normal map is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal operation switching setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map.
Also, if the value of the control pointer during normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the process shifts to normal operation without performing the process of updating the normal process control pointer area by 1 in step B603. A setting process (step B604) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B613) to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c. End the process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time that is the open time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B615). End the normal power operation setting process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B616 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, so that the process number is “4”. Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as the wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is set as the normal power release time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as the general power remaining ball processing time in step B618. .

  Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is “winning symbol 1” during the normal figure high probability, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the normal drawing display process shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map display process, “500 milliseconds” is acquired as the public power open time. Therefore, after the elapse of the display time of 600 milliseconds, the ordinary power open time is “500 milliseconds”, so the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is opened for 500 milliseconds, and thereafter the control pointer during normal drawing is “4”. Therefore, 600 msec of ordinary electric ball remaining time is set.

  Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is “winning symbol 2” during the normal probability, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map display process, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the normal power transmission. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and thereafter, the control pointer is “2” during the normal map, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” during the normal map, so that the electric power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is updated to “4” during the normal map for 600 msec. The ordinary power remaining ball processing time is set.

  Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is “winning symbol 3” during the normal probability, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map display process, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the normal power transmission. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and then the control pointer is “0” during the normal time, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “1” during the normal map, so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “2” during the normal map for 200 msec. The waiting time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “3” for the normal map, so that the public power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer for the normal map is updated to “4” for 600 msec. The ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time is set.

  In the case where the normal figure stop symbol is any one of “hit symbol 1”, “hit symbol 2”, and “hit symbol 3” during the low probability of normal symbols, step B508 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. , “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer, and “100 ms” is acquired as the normal power release time in step B509 of the normal map display process. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the public power release time is “100 milliseconds”, so the public power is released for 100 milliseconds, and thereafter, the control pointer is “4” during the usual time, so that the 600 milliseconds public access time. The electric ball remaining time is set.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39A, in the normal chart end process, the normal chart normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-described normal figure end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, a process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 40 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 40, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect operation unit 700 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the effect operation unit 700 is read in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operation unit 700, a process for changing the effect contents is performed.

  Then, a screen shot process is performed to capture the displayed image (step C10), setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and a change of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player, etc. The hall / player setting mode process for receiving the operation is performed (step C11). Next, a random number update process (step C12) for updating a random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and a received command check process for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 (step C12). Step C13) is performed.

  Next, a scenario setting process (step C14) and a motion control process (step C15) for controlling the progress of the production are performed, the drawing command is edited and transmitted (step C16), and the drawing command preparation end is set. (Step C17). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is frame switching timing (step C18). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C18 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C18; N), the process of step C18 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C18 that it is the frame switching timing (step C18; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C19).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C20) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the information display device 800, and the frame decoration device 18. Control processing (step C22), movable body control processing (step C23) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the processing for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Direction button input processing]
Next, the details of the effect button input process (step C9) in the main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the effect button input process, first, the value of the current effect button state area is copied to the previous effect button state area (step C31), and the effect operation unit 700 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29). ) Port state data is copied to the current production button state region (step C32). Then, the state change data of the effect operation unit 700 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is generated based on the value of the previous effect button state area, the value of the current effect button state area, and the like, and is saved in the effect button rising edge area. (Step C33).
Here, the input from the production operation unit 700 is read, for example, in a timer interruption process with a period of 1 msec, and the state is fixed by performing chattering removal or the like. For example, in the effect button input process with a period of about 33.3 milliseconds, the state of input from the effect operation unit 700 is confirmed, the input content is confirmed, and a process of switching effects is performed according to the result.

Next, it is determined whether the touch sensor 29a is in an effective period (step C34).
If it is determined in step C34 that the touch sensor 29a is not valid (step C34; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C34 that the touch sensor 29a is in an effective period (step C34; Y), it is determined which of the touch sensors has an input (step C35). Here, when the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “normal sensitivity”, the touch operation on the effect operation unit 700 can be detected, and any touch is detected when the touch operation is detected. It is determined that there is an input to the sensor. Further, when the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “high sensitivity”, the hand-holding operation and the contact operation for the effect operation unit 700 can be detected, and the hand-holding operation and the contact operation are detected. In this case, it is determined that any touch sensor has an input.

If it is determined in step C35 that no input is input to any touch sensor (step C35; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C35 that any touch sensor has an input (step C35; Y), it is determined whether a space touch effect is being performed (step C36).
Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a space touch effect (aerial touch effect) and a button touch effect as a touch effect that is a kind of effect (PB (push button) effect) using the effect operation unit 700. Is configured to run.
During the space touch effect, when a hand-holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, the effect is changed by switching the effect by the display on the display device 41. During the space touch effect, the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “high sensitivity”.
In addition, during the button touch effect, when a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, the effect is changed by switching the effect by the display on the display device 41. During the button touch effect, the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “normal sensitivity”.

When it is determined in step C36 that the space touch effect is not being performed (step C36; N), that is, the button touch effect is being performed and a touch operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, the touch sensor control process (step C37) is performed. Do.
Then, as a result of the touch sensor control process (step C37), it is determined whether or not the input content of the touch sensor 29a is confirmed (step C38).
Specifically, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image that prompts a contact movement operation with respect to the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41 and must monitor a plurality of inputs such as a flick operation and a round tracing operation. If an operation that cannot be confirmed is requested, it is determined that the input content has been confirmed when it can be confirmed that the requested operation has been performed based on a plurality of input results. Here, the multiple-time input result is, for example, state change data of the rendering operation unit 700 generated in each step C33 of multiple rendering button input processing executed within a predetermined input content confirmation period. That is. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button input process is performed at a cycle of about 33.3 msec. Therefore, for example, when the input content determination period is set to 333 msec, the effect button input process is performed 10 times within the input content determination period. Is executed to generate 10 state change data.
For example, the effect control device 300 displays an image or the like that prompts a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41 and requests an operation that can be confirmed only by monitoring one input such as a touch operation. When it is determined that the requested operation has been performed based on the current input result, it is determined that the input content has been determined.

If it is determined in step C38 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a is not finalized (step C38; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C38 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a has been confirmed (step C38; Y), it is determined whether the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded as a result of the touch sensor control process (step C37). (Step C39).
Specifically, for example, the effect control device 300 displays an image or the like that prompts a plurality of contact operations (continuous hitting (continuous touch) operation, etc.) or a plurality of contact movement operations (rubbing operations, etc.) to the effect operation unit 700. When displayed on the display device 41, the ratio of the number of times that the input content has been determined in step C38 after the start of the display to the number of effect button input processes executed after the start of the display is determined in advance. When the predetermined probability is reached, or when the number of times that the input content has been determined in step C38 after the start of the display has reached a predetermined number of times, the effective probability has been exceeded. judge.
In addition, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image that prompts one contact operation (one-touch operation or the like) for the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41, or one contact movement operation for the effect operation unit 700. When an image prompting (flick operation or the like) is displayed on the display device 41, it is determined that the input content has been confirmed in step C38, so it is determined that the effective probability has been unconditionally exceeded.

If it is determined in step C39 that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has not been exceeded (step C39; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C39 that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded (step C39; Y), the input result information of the touch sensor 29a is stored (step C40), and the touch sensor 29a is set to invalid. (Step C41). If the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “high sensitivity”, it is set to “normal sensitivity” (step C42), and the process proceeds to step C43.

In step C43, it is determined whether the push sensor (production button switch 25a) is in an effective period (step C43).
If it is determined in step C43 that the PUSH sensor is not valid (step C43; N), the effect button input process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C43 that the PUSH sensor is in an effective period (step C43; Y), whether there is an input to the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a), that is, a pressing operation on the production operation unit 700 is detected. It is determined whether it has been done (step C44).

If it is determined in step C44 that there is no input to the PUSH sensor (step C44; N), the effect button input process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C44 that there is an input to the push sensor (step C44; Y), that is, when a pressing operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, the effective probability of the push sensor (effect button switch 25a) is determined. It is determined whether the breakthrough has occurred (step C45).
Specifically, for example, when the display device 41 displays an image or the like that prompts a plurality of pressing operations (such as a continuous hitting (continuous PUSH) operation) on the display operation unit 700, the display control device 300 displays the display. When the ratio of the number of times of determining that there is an input in step C44 after the start of the display to the number of effect button input processes executed after the start reaches a predetermined ratio or when the display starts Thereafter, when the number of times it is determined that there is an input in step C44 reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded.
In addition, for example, when the display device 41 displays an image or the like that prompts one press operation (one PUSH operation or the like) for the effect operation unit 700, the effect control device 300 determines that there is an input in step C44. Therefore, it is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded unconditionally.

When it determines with not having exceeded the effective probability of a PUSH sensor by step C45 (step C45; N), an effect button input process is complete | finished.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C45 that the effective probability of the push sensor has been exceeded (step C45; Y), the input result information of the push sensor (production button switch 25a) is stored (step C49), and the push sensor (production) The button switch 25a) is set to invalid (step C50), and the effect button input process is terminated.

When it is determined in step C36 that the space touch effect is being performed (step C36; Y), it is determined whether the space touch effect is an effect handled as a PUSH sensor (effect button switch 25a) (step C46). .
Here, the space touch effect includes an effect handled as a PUSH sensor and an effect not handled as a PUSH sensor.
In the effect handled as the push sensor, the effect control device 300 recognizes that the operation corresponding to the push operation (pressing operation) is performed when the hand-holding operation on the effect operating unit 700 is detected, and the pressing operation. It is comprised so that the control corresponding to may be performed.
In the production not handled as a push sensor, the production control device 300 recognizes that an operation corresponding to a touch operation (contact operation) is performed when a hand-holding operation on the production operation unit 700 is detected. The control corresponding to the contact operation is performed.

When it is determined in step C46 that the effect is not handled as a PUSH sensor (step C46; N), that is, when the hand-holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is regarded as a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700, the process proceeds to step C37. To do.
In this case, for example, when a finger or the like slides above the rendering operation unit 700 (specifically, within the detection range of the touch sensor 29a above the rendering operation unit 700), a flick to the rendering operation unit 700 is performed. It can be considered that the operation was performed. Further, for example, when the finger or the like moves up and down a plurality of times above the effect operation unit 700 (specifically, when the finger or the like reciprocates between the detection range and the detection range of the touch sensor 29a). It can be considered that a plurality of contact operations on the operation unit 700 have been performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C46 that the effect is handled as a push sensor (step C46; Y), that is, when the hand-holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is regarded as a pressing operation on the effect operation unit 700, the touch sensor 29a is used. It is set to invalid (step C47), the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to “normal sensitivity” (step C48), and the process proceeds to step C49.
As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the effect is handled as a PUSH sensor, the input is immediately performed without determining whether the input content is confirmed or whether the effective probability is exceeded. Is determined to be a touch input but handled as a push input.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the scenario setting process (step C14) in the above-described main process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the scenario setting process, first, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step C61), and the scenario analysis process ( Step C62) is executed. Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step C63), and scenario analysis processing (step C64) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step C65), and scenario analysis processing (step C66) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step C67), and scenario analysis processing (step C68) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step C69), and scenario analysis processing (step C70) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step C71), and scenario analysis processing (step C72) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step C73), and scenario analysis processing (step C74) is executed based on this preparation.

  In this embodiment, there are seven scenario layers, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 6. Of these seven scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the cut-in notice character, and scenario layer 2 is mainly the left design. Scenario layer 3 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, scenario layer 4 is a layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, and scenario layer 5 is a layer that mainly controls the hold. The scenario layer 6 is a layer mainly controlling the notice character.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, in this embodiment, the number of scenario layers is seven, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the layers used for backgrounds and notices are increased or decreased depending on the model specifications, and in this embodiment, description is limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is The layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, the scenario layer 4 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 2, and the scenario layer 6 mainly controls the hold. It may be an aspect that it is a layer to be used.

  Further, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is something to be controlled, the scenario management is performed in the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X (X = 0 to 6). When the address of the area is stored and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL. For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 43 shows the received command check process (step C13) in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C81), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C82). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C82; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C82; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C83).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C84), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C85), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C86). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C86 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C86; N), the process returns to step C84. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C86; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C87), and the received command analysis process (step C88) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C89), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C90). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C90; N), the process returns to step C87. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C90; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 44 shows the received command analysis process (step C88) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C101), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C102). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C103).

  If it is determined in step C102 that MODE and ACT are not in the normal range (step C102; N), or if it is determined in step C103 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C103; N), reception is performed. The command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in step C103 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C103; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of a single command such as a pending number command or an error command (step S103). C104). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C104; Y), the single command processing (step C105) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C104 that the MODE is not within the range of the single command (step C104; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the design command (step C106). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C106; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C107) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C106 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C106; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of variable commands (step C108). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C108; Y), the variable command process (step C109) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C108 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C108; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C110). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C110; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C111) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C110 that MODE is not in the range of the big hit system command (step C110; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the small hit system command (step C112). The small hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to the small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the small hit system command (step C112; Y), the small hit system command process (step C113) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C112 that MODE is not within the range of the small hit command (step C112; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C114). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C114; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C115) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C114 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C114; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read variation command (step C116). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C116; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command process (step C117) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C116 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C116; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  In the single-shot command processing (step C55), a special figure for performing processing related to the special figure 1 hold generated when the special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) is received. A special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing a process related to the special figure 2 hold generated when a special figure hold number command corresponding to the 1 hold information setting process or the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is received. included. In these special figure 1 hold information setting process and special figure 2 hold information setting process, a process of displaying a decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 or the information display device 800 is performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory notification means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display corresponding to each start memory.

  Also, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) in which the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance of whether or not (or what variation pattern will be the change pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal display, For example, an effect is displayed on the device 41. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern or a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance. To the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single command processing]
45 and 46 show the single command processing (step C105) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is RAM initialization (step C121). When it is determined that the MODE is RAM initialization (step C121; Y), the fourth symbol LED (L1, L2) is output to be turned off (step C122), and the turn-off flag is set (step C123).

  The turn-off flag indicates that the information display device 800 has performed processing for outputting turn-off of L1 and L2 (see FIG. 5) displaying the fourth symbol. This turn-off flag is kept set while power is supplied to the production control device 300, and is cleared when the production control device 300 is turned off, or is an area to be initialized in the main process of FIG. In the process of saving the initial value at power-on (step C8), the initial value is set and cleared.

  Thereafter, in order to set a display when performing processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100, setting of various initial screen information (step C124) and power-on scenario data setting processing (Step C125) is performed. In setting various initial screen information, the special figure type and the symbol type are cleared, and the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are set to 0. Also, “753” is set as the stop symbol. Then, the customer waiting A is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C126), the command received flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not RAM initialization (step C121; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a power failure recovery (step C127).

  If it is determined that MODE is power failure recovery (step C127; Y), the fourth symbol LED (L1, L2) is output to be extinguished (step C128), and the extinction flag is set (step C129). Thereafter, a power failure recovery setting process (step C130) for performing a process related to power failure recovery is performed, a command received flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not a power failure recovery (step C127; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a customer waiting demonstration (step C131).

  If it is determined that the MODE is a customer waiting demo (step C131; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is a normal command (step C132). If it is not a normal command (step C132; N), a command received flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. If it is a normal command (step C132; Y), it is determined whether there is a turn-off flag (step C133).

  And when there exists a light extinction flag (step C133; Y), it transfers to step C136. If there is no turn-off flag (step C133; N), the fourth symbol LED (L1, L2) is turned off (step C134), and the turn-off flag is set (step C135). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the P machine state is set during the customer waiting demonstration (step C136). If it is already set during the customer waiting demonstration (step C136; Y), the command received flag is set ( Step C150), the single command processing is terminated. If it is not set during the customer waiting demonstration (step C136; N), a customer waiting scenario data setting process for setting an effect in the customer waiting state is performed (step C137). Further, the customer waiting A is set as the P machine state (step C138), the command received flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C131 that the MODE is not a customer waiting demonstration (step C131; N), it is determined whether the MODE is within the special figure 1 reserved system range (step C139) as shown in FIG. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 holding system (step C139; Y), a special figure 1 holding information setting process (step C140) for storing information related to the holding of special figure 1 is performed. Then, the command received flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not in the special figure 1 reserved system range (step C139; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the special figure 2 reserved system range (step C141).

  If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the special figure 2 holding system (step C141; Y), a special figure 2 holding information setting process (step C142) for storing information related to the holding of the special figure 2 is performed. Then, the command received flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. When it is determined that MODE is not within the special figure 2 reservation system range (step C141; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the symbol stop system range (step C143).

  When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol stop system (step C143; Y), symbol stop scenario data setting processing for setting an effect when the symbol is stopped is performed (step C144), and the P machine state is set. Normal is set (step C145). Then, the command received flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. When it is determined that MODE is not within the symbol stop system range (step C143; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the probability information system range (step C146).

  If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C146; Y), a probability information setting process (step C147) for performing a process such as setting of an effect corresponding to the probability state is performed to receive a command. The completed flag is set (step C150), and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the probability information system (step C146; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the error / illegal system range (step C148).

  If it is determined that the MODE is within the error / unauthorized range (step C148; Y), an error / illegal setting process (step C149) for performing error notification and the like is performed, and the command received flag is set. (Step C150), the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not in the error / invalid range (step C148; N), processing corresponding to the allocation determination for all of the MODEs other than those described above that can be set as a single-shot command is performed. End single-shot command processing.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 47 shows the variable command processing (step C109) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C161). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2.

  When this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C161; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure type is not yet determined (step C161; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process for checking a combination of the variation command and the symbol command is performed (step C162). ), It is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C163).

  If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C163; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C163; N), variation effect setting processing is performed (step C164). The symbol type means a category of symbols. Examples of the symbol type include an off symbol, a 16R probability variation A to F symbol, a 6R probability variation symbol, a 2R probability variation A, B symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that an effect such as when a symbol command of 16R probability variation A symbol is received even though a variation command of variation (variation pattern command) is received. This means that the combination is inconsistent (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type).

  In the variation effect setting process (step C164), as a process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command, the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command, and the variation command is determined. A process of setting information for performing the corresponding performance is performed. Next, a special figure change is set as the P machine state (step C165). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Then, the command received flag is set (step C166), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 48 shows the jackpot command process (step C111) in the received command analysis process described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C171). If it is determined that MODE is fanfare (step C171; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting effects during fanfare is performed (step C172), and the P machine state is set to fanfare (step C173). Then, the command received flag is set (step C183), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not a fanfare (step C171; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C174).

  When it is determined that the MODE is a round (step C174; Y), a round effect setting process for setting an effect during the round is performed (step C175), and the P machine state is set to the round (step C176). Then, the command received flag is set (step C183), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not a round (step C174; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C177).

  When it is determined that MODE is an interval (step C177; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C178), and the P machine state is set to the interval (step C179). Then, the command received flag is set (step C183), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not an interval (step C177; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an ending (step C180).

  If it is determined that the MODE is an ending (step C180; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an effect during ending is performed (step C181), and the P machine state is set to ending (step C182). Then, the command received flag is set (step C183), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not ending (step C177; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Small hit command processing]
FIG. 49 shows the small hit command processing (step C113) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this small hit command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is a small hit fanfare (step C201). When the MODE is determined to be a small hit fanfare (small hit fanfare command) (step C201; Y), a small hit / meeting notice setting process for setting a small hit / small notice that is a look-ahead effect during the small hit is performed. (Step C202), a small hit effect setting process for setting effects until the ending of the small hit gaming state is started (Step C203). Then, the P machine state is set to small hit (step C204), the command received flag is set (step C208), and the small hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not a small hit fanfare (step C201; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a small hit end screen (command for a small hit end screen) (step C205).

  When it is determined that the MODE is a small hit end screen (step C205; Y), a small hit ending effect setting process for setting an effect at the end of the small hit is performed (step C206), and the P machine state is changed to the small hit ending. It is set as medium (step C207). Then, the command received flag is set (step C208), and the small hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not a small hit end screen (step C205; N), the small hit command processing is ended. It should be noted that all the effects from the start to the end of the small hit gaming state may be set in the small hit effect setting process (step C203).

[Small hit notice setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the small hitting advance notice setting process (step C202) in the small hitting command process described above. In this small hitting advance notice setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step C211). If it is in the high probability state (step C211; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory that is a big hit (step C212).

  When there is no start memory that is a big hit (step C212; N), it is determined whether the value of the game number counter that counts the number of games from the end of the special gaming state is within a predetermined range (step C213). The game number counter is cleared to 0 when a special game state occurs, and is updated by +1 at the start of the special figure variation display game. The predetermined range in this determination is 50 to 62, and it is determined whether or not it is a small hit occurring in the 50th to 62nd game from the end of the special gaming state.

  If the game number counter is not within the predetermined range (step C213; N), a notice corresponding to the small hitting notice counter value is set (step C214), the small hitting notice counter is updated by +1 (step C215), The middle notice setting process is terminated. If the game number counter is within the predetermined range (step C213; Y), a specific notice is set (step C216), and the small hit / meeting notice setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is a start memory that is a big hit (step C212; Y), it is determined whether the big hit is a 16R probability variation A (step C217). If it is not 16R probability variation A (step C217; N), the big hit notice 1 is set (step C218), and the small hit medium notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is 16R probability variation A (step C317; Y), the big hit notice 2 is set (step C219), and the small hit medium notice setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 shows the contents of the small hitting advance notice set in the small hitting advance notice setting process. The content of the notice is a character dialogue displayed in the small hit gaming state. FIG. 51 (a) shows the contents of a notice when there is a start memory that is a big hit. In the jackpot notice 1 selected for cases other than 16R probability variation A, the line “Easy! Easy victory!” Is selected, and in the jackpot notice 2 selected for 16R probability variation A, the line “Yeah !!!!” Selected.

  FIG. 51 (b) shows the content of the notice when there is no start memory that is a big hit. In the notice according to the small hitting advance notice counter value set when the occurrence of the small hit is not the 50th to 62nd games from the end of the special gaming state, any of the five types of lines is selected according to the small hit notice counter value. Selected. Note that N in the appearance condition is an integer. Also, in the specific notice set when the small hit is 50 to 62 games from the end of the special gaming state, the line “Don't give up!” Is selected. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a high probability state is set from the end of the special gaming state to the 80th game, and when a small hit occurs in the 50th to 62nd games that approach the end of the high probability state. A special line is displayed to give the expectation of the game in the remaining high probability state.

  Although the selection mode is such that the presence of the start memory that is a big hit is clearly notified, a selectable notice may be provided regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory that is a big hit. Further, by providing a plurality of such notices and changing the selection probabilities according to the presence or absence of the start memory that is a big hit, the possibility of existence of the start memory that becomes a big hit may differ depending on the notice. Or you may include the case where it selects at random regardless of the presence or absence of a big hit from the notice shown in FIG.

  In addition to the 16R probability variation A, the details of the notice may differ depending on the type of jackpot. Furthermore, the notice content may be made different depending on pre-read information such as the occurrence of reach and the type of reach. In addition, when there are a plurality of start memories that are big hits when there are a plurality of start memories, it is possible to execute a notice that informs that effect. In addition, the previously executed notice content may be stored, and if there is a start memory that is a big hit, it may be notified that there is a start memory that will be a big hit by performing the same notice.

  The content of the notice selected in this way is set as part of the small hit effect during the small hit effect setting process (step C203). That is, the production control device 300 serves as a pre-production control unit capable of performing a predetermined production based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination unit (game control device 100).

  52 to 54 show examples of effects in games. After the special game state based on the big hit, the specific game state is in a high probability state and a short time operation state. This specific game state continues from the end of the special game state until the special figure variation display game is executed 80 times. As shown in FIG. 52A, in the specific gaming state, the display of “peach peach mode”, which is the name of the specific gaming state, is displayed on the left in the mode display unit 901 set at the upper part of the display area of the display device 41. It is displayed so as to flow and notifies that it is in a specific gaming state. Further, in the remaining number display section 902 set below the mode display section 901, the remaining number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in the specific game state is displayed. Here, it is informed that 80 special map fluctuation display games can be executed including the currently executed special map fluctuation display game. The remaining number is updated by -1 when the special figure variation display game is stopped.

  In the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 903 set in the center of the display area, a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Here, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which the left symbol (first symbol), the middle symbol (second symbol), and the right symbol (third symbol) are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed to display the result mode. .

  In addition, a decoration special figure start memory display 905 corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory is displayed in the start memory display area 904 provided at the lower part of the display area. In the start memory display area 904, the decorative special figure start memory display 905 corresponding to the start memory one-on-one is displayed side by side in one line of the start memory. The decoration special figure start memory display 905 at the left end corresponds to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. Here, there are four start memories in each of the first start memory and the second start memory, indicating that there are a total of eight start memories. In addition, it is good also as a display which can distinguish a 1st start memory and a 2nd start memory.

  At the lower part of the display area and to the left of the start memory display area 904, a changing memory display unit 906 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure change display game is provided. In the changing memory display unit 906, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display 905 corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game is shifted to be displayed as a changing memory display 907. According to the display mode of the during-change memory display 907, the result of the special figure change display game to be executed, the change pattern, and the like are suggested or notified.

  A notice display section 908 is provided at the lower part of the display area and to the left of the changing memory display section 906 to provide a pre-reading effect for the notice and start memory for the special figure change display game being executed. . Here, the character is displayed on the notice display unit 908, and the notice is given by the character's lines and actions. In the notice display unit 908, a small hit notice in the small hit game state is also executed.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the fourth special figure variation display game is executed from the start of the specific game state, and the result of this special figure variation display game is a small hit and is shown in FIG. 52 (c). As described above, “241” which is the result mode of the small hit is derived in the decoration special figure change display game, and the small hit gaming state is started. At the start of the small hit gaming state, a small hit fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of this command, the above-described small hit / meeting notice setting process (step C202) An effect setting process (step C203) is performed to set an effect in the small hit gaming state including the small hit advance notice.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the derivation of the small hit result may be indicated by the small hit symbol that appears only when the small hit result is obtained. Further, the small hit symbol is used as a symbol related to the decoration start memory display 905 (in this case, a symbol imitating a peach), and a notification is given that a small hit notification will be performed during the special symbol start memory display. May be. In addition, when a small hitting notice is given, there is a higher possibility that a larger number of starting memories can be notified of the existence of a starting memory that is a big hit. Therefore, a reach state occurs in the special figure variation display game that is a small hit. In this way, a time for increasing the start-up memory may be secured.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the small hit gaming state started based on the derivation of the small hit result includes a small hit fanfare period (t1 to t2), a small hit 1R (t2 to t3), a small hit interval (t3 to t4), Small hits 2R (t4 to t5) and small hits ending (t5 to t6). The time of each period is as shown in the figure, and this time is the same as that in the special game state based on 2R probability variation A and B.

  FIG. 54 shows an example of a small hitting notice. FIGS. 54A to 54C show an example in the case where there is a start memory that is a big hit. When the small hit gaming state is started, a small hit fanfare period is reached. In this small hitting fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the same display as the display when the small hitting is derived is maintained, and it is as if the stop time of the special figure variation display game is extended. To do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), a big hit announcement is made from the small hit 1R to the ending. Here, since there is a start memory that becomes 16R probability variation A, the line “Yeah !!!!” is displayed as the jackpot notice 2. Note that the display is the same as the small hit fanfare period except that the small hitting advance notice is given, and the stop time of the special figure variation display game is extended even during this period. Thereafter, the small hit gaming state is ended, and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 54 (c).

  FIGS. 54D to 54F show examples in the case where there is no start memory that is a big hit. In this case as well, a small hitting notice is made in the same manner as when there is a start-up memory that is a big hit, but the contents are different. As shown in FIG. 54 (d), the same display as the display when the small hit is derived is maintained in the small hit fanfare period, and a notice is given as shown in FIG. 54 (e) from the small hit 1R to the ending. Here, it is the special figure variation display game for the fourth time from the end of the special gaming state, and the small hitting notice counter value is 5N-4 (for example, 1), so the line “Still More !!” is displayed. . Thereafter, the small hit gaming state is ended, and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 54 (f). In this case, the content of the notice changes according to the small hit notice counter value. In addition, when a small hit is derived in the special figure variation display game of the 50th to 62nd times from the end of the special gaming state, a specific advance notice (“Don't give up!”) Is performed.

  Thus, since the pre-reading effect is performed when the small hit occurs in the specific game state in the high probability state, the interest of the game can be improved. That is, at present, there are many game machines in which the left-handed game is played in both the low probability state and the high probability state with the special figure 1 and 2 alternating winning type. In such a gaming machine, the special figures 1 and 2 are digested in the order of winning, and both are configured such that the small hits are generated at a predetermined rate, specifically, the special figure 1 is generated with a higher probability. For this reason, small hits frequently occur during the high probability state, and particularly immediately after the start of the high probability state, there is a possibility that the small hit will occur because the first start memory by the alternate winning in the winning device remains. high. The small win game state executed by winning the small hit is a low “between” for players who are unlikely to win the big win and play the game in anticipation of the next big hit. End up. However, by performing the pre-reading effect in the small hit game state, it is possible to give the small hit game state a new value and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a pre-reading effect, it is also possible to execute a hold change notice for making a notice about the corresponding start memory by changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 905. In the small hit gaming state, It is possible to make a preliminary announcement in parallel with a small hit. In particular, with respect to the decorative special figure start memory display 905 in which the pending change notice is started before the start of the small hit gaming state, a line as shown in FIG. 51 is displayed as a small hit notice in advance based on the pre-read result of the corresponding start memory. Information on the start memory may be notified. In addition, the hold change notice may be started only in the small hit gaming state.

  In addition, in the small hit when it is not in the specific gaming state, the above-mentioned prior notice during the small hit is not performed, but it may be performed. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect as described above is performed in the specific gaming state that is in the high probability state and the short-time operation state. However, in the gaming state in which one of the high-probability state and the short-time operation state is set. Similarly, a prefetch effect as described above may be performed. Further, in 2R probability variation A and B, the same notice as the small hitting notice may be performed. Further, for other types of big hits, the same announcement as the small hit announcement may be performed. In particular, if it is performed during the short opening period, a new value can be given to the short opening period that is not valuable to the player.

  In addition, the contents of the announcement for the small hits are not limited to those described above. For example, the character of the notice display unit 908 may act on the decoration special figure start memory display 905 to perform an effect of specifying the start memory to be prefetched. Further, by using the changing memory display 907 corresponding to the special figure changing display game that is the small hit result, the effect of specifying the start memory to be pre-read and the display mode of the pre-read result of the start memory are changed. You may make it perform the production | presentation which performs suggestion alerting | reporting. Further, the character may be acted on the changing memory display 907 corresponding to the special figure changing display game in which the character has a small hit result. For example, when the character divides the changing memory display 907 imitating a peach, a new character appears, and the new character acts on the decoration special figure start memory display 905 to display the prefetch result. You may do it. Further, when the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the small hit gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a new prefetch result is notified in the ending of the small hit gaming state or more detailed information on the prefetched result already notified. You may be made to perform an alert.

  Based on the above, a plurality of identification information fluctuates based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32. When a special result is derived as a result of the variable display game to be displayed, a special game state in which a variable prize device (special variable prize device 38) is converted from a closed state to an open state to give a player a game value In a gaming machine provided with control means that can be generated (game control device 100, effect control device 300), the control means extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening, and uses the predetermined random number. Based on the starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as the starting storage and the starting storage stored in the starting storage means, the result of the variable display game is displayed before the start of the variable display game. Pre-determination means (game control device 100) capable of making a pre-determination, and game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means. ) And a pre-production control means (production control device 300) capable of performing a predetermined production based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination unit, and a variable display over a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state generation means (game control device 100) capable of generating a specific game state that is executed so that the game is advantageous to the player, and the special result includes a first game state that can generate the first special game state. A second special result that can generate one special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special gaming state (special gaming state) (Small allowance ), And the specific gaming state generation means increases the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result in the specific gaming state than the normal state, and the prior effect control means When the second special gaming state occurs, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect (notice during small hits) based on the prior determination result of the prior determination means in the second special gaming state that occurs.

  FIG. 55 shows an example of an effect when there is a start memory that is a small hit. In the case of making a preliminary announcement during a small hit, the larger the number of start memories, the higher the possibility that the presence of a start memory that is a big hit can be notified. Therefore, when the start memory number is a predetermined number or less (for example, 4 or less) and there is a start memory that is a small hit, the start memory number is set before the start of the small hit gaming state based on the small hit. An increase promotion notification for urging the increase is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the number of start memories is equal to or less than a predetermined number (here, 4 or less), and there is a start memory that is a small hit, and the condition for executing the increase promotion notification is It is established. Here, the start memory that is digested fourth is the start memory that is a small hit, and for the purpose of explanation, the corresponding special figure start memory display 905 has a display color different from that of the other special figure start memory display 905. In practice, however, the display color is the same as that of the other decorative special figure start memory display 905. Of course, as a pre-reading effect in the decoration special figure start memory display 905, the display mode may be changed, such as changing the display color or displaying the decoration special figure start storage display 903 to shake.

  In the increase promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the decoration special figure change display game display unit 903 is withdrawn from the center of the display area, and there is a possibility that a small hitting notice may be performed in the center of the display area. A notification display (in this case, a display of “predicting hold open time ...”) is performed. Further, in the start memory display area 904, a display for instructing to generate the start memory (here, a display of “save hold!”) Is performed.

  Thereafter, when a new special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the number of games until the small hitting advance notice is made is notified. This notification is updated each time the special figure variation display game is executed as shown in FIGS. 55 (d) and 55 (e). Further, when the start memory is generated and the start memory number reaches the upper limit as shown in FIG. 55 (d), a display to that effect (here, “achievement !!”) is displayed. Then, when the small hit result is derived as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the small hit gaming state is started and a preliminary announcement during the small hit is performed.

  FIG. 56 shows another example of the small hit announcement. In this small hitting advance notice, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), a display notifying that the small hitting advance notice is performed in the small hitting fanfare period is performed, and as shown in FIG. A notice is given for the start memory whose digestion order is 1st to 4th in the hit interval. In this notice, a display that gives a notice of reliability, a variation pattern, or the like, which is likely to be a big hit about the corresponding start memory that the decorative special figure start memory display imitating a peach shape breaks, is performed. For example, it is reported that the start memory with the first digestion order has a high reliability of 5%, which is likely to be a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the advance notification is similarly made for the start-up memory whose digestion order is the fifth to eighth in the small hit 2R to the small hit ending. In this case, the advance notice is divided into two groups, the first half and the latter half, in the starting memory digestion order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice is sequentially performed in a predetermined order based on the start memory digestion order. Or you may make it give a notice at random regardless of digestion.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (d), in the special figure variation display game after the end of the small hit gaming state, the preliminary announcement during the small hit is maintained as it is. Also, in the special figure variation display game after the end of the small hit game state, the special special figure start memory display 905 (in this case, the fifth start start memory is the digestion order) in which the notice content was not displayed in the preliminary hit announcement. A special notice start display display 905) may be given a notice, or the notice contents given in the small hit notice may be changed.

  FIG. 57 shows another example of the small hit announcement. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the small hitting advance notice, a display indicating the correspondence between the operation point of the effect operation unit 700 and the decorative special figure start memory display 905 defined by the start memory is made in the display area. The advance notice is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display 905 corresponding to the operation point touched by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), when the effect operation unit 700 is touched like a circle, all the operation points corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display are touched, and all decoration special figures start. A notice will be given for the memory display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), it is also possible to perform a touch operation on individual operation points. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), a decorative special figure start storage display 905 that is highly likely to be notified with a high degree of expectation may be displayed so as to be swayed to prompt selection.

  It should be noted that the number of decorative special figure start memory displays that can be selected by the player may be limited to a predetermined number or less. In this case, the predetermined number may always be constant or may vary. If it fluctuates, it may be changed randomly, or it changes depending on the game result, such as the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed from a specific point in time, the number of occurrences of small hits, the number of occurrences of a specific performance, etc. You may make it do.

  FIG. 58 also shows another example of small hitting notice. In this small hitting announcement, the sub display device 910 provided separately from the display device 41 is also used. The sub display device 910 can be converted into a state positioned below the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 58A and a state positioned in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. . In the state shown in FIG. 58 (a), the sub display device 910 is located behind the game area 32, but this portion of the game board 30 is made of a transparent member, and the player can use the sub display device 910. Is visible. Further, the sub display device 910 can rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), at the stage before the small hit gaming state is started, the sub display device 910 is displayed to indicate that a small hitting advance notice is performed, and the sub display device 910 is shaken. To work. In addition, the decoration special figure start memory display is displayed so as to shake. Such an operation or display may be performed even when the advance notice is not performed during the small hit.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the small hit gaming state is started, the sub display device 910 moves to the front of the display device 41, and the decoration special figure start memory display 905 moves to the sub display device 910. The display is swallowed. At this time, the total value of the first start memory number and the second start memory number is displayed numerically in the start memory display area 904 (here, 8). Further, the sub display device 910 is rotated as shown in FIG. 58 (c) so that the decorative special figure start memory display returns from the sub display device 910 to the original position of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 58 (d). indicate. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), in the decorative special figure start memory display returned to the original position of the display device 41, a notice about the corresponding start memory is displayed.

  FIG. 59 shows an arrangement example of the sub display device 910. The sub display device 910 can be arranged at an arbitrary position, and is not limited to one, and a plurality of sub display apparatuses 910 may be arranged. In addition, in a case where conversion into a state where the display device 41 is located in front and a state where a part or all of the display device 41 is retracted from the front is possible, a corresponding portion of the game board is configured with a transparent member. The display of the sub display device 910 is preferably visible.

  Next, a description will be given of a screen shot function that allows an image displayed on the display device 41 to be captured and stored by the player's operation and a change in the setting of the gaming machine based on the operation of a store clerk or player of the game store. In recent years, there are an increasing number of players shooting special effects (premier effects, etc.) that occur during games with mobile phone cameras, but effects that occur while operating the handle, effects that appear suddenly, and push button operations The effects produced by doing so are very difficult to shoot, and there is a problem that the photographed image may be out of focus, or light may enter due to a decorative lamp or the like, and shooting may not be performed well. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to store the effects displayed during the game and display them at a timing that can be dedicated to shooting at the end of the game, etc., and calmly shoot the image that the player wants. It has a screenshot function that allows you to

  FIG. 60 shows an example of image storage. As shown in FIGS. 60A to 60E, the display device 41 is producing effects. If the player wants to save the image of FIG. 60 (e), a screen shot operation (in this case, a forward flick operation) is performed in the effect operation unit 700 at the timing when the image is displayed. Based on this screen shot operation, sound imitating the shutter sound of the camera is output and the image at that time is stored. When the image is stored, as shown in FIG. 60F, a confirmation display 911 for displaying the stored image for a predetermined time at a predetermined position (here, upper left) of the display area is performed. Note that a sound notifying that the confirmation display 911 has been saved may be output. The confirmation display 911 may temporarily display an image when the screen shot operation is performed, and may store the image when the player performs an operation indicating that the screen shot operation is performed.

  The operation mode of the screen shot operation for storing the image is different from the operation mode of the rendering operation unit 700 required in the rendering, and the scene where the operation of the rendering operation unit 700 is requested in the rendering. Even so, the image can be reliably stored. That is, the push buttons provided in the production operation unit 700 in this embodiment and the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-158493 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-311961 are performed at various timings of the production in the game. It is possible to intervene in the production by accepting the operation. However, when it is possible to save an image by the operation of the effect operation unit 700, when it is desired to save an image at a timing at which intervention to the effect can be performed by the operation of the effect operation unit 700, the effect operation for saving the image is performed. By operating the unit 700, there is a risk of unintentionally intervening in the production. Therefore, the operation mode (first operation) for intervening in the production and the operation mode (second operation) of the screen shot operation for storing the images are set as different operation modes, so that the operation intended by the player is performed. It becomes possible to store images at any timing, and the player can be further enjoyed.

  The image stored in this way can be displayed in the customer waiting state. FIG. 61 shows an example of displaying a stored image. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the special figure variation display game ends with the result of losing in a state where there is no start memory, a customer waiting state is entered. When the presentation operation unit 700 is pressed in this waiting state, the setting of the gaming machine and the display of the stored image can be performed. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration effect for displaying various images is started. As one of the customer waiting demonstration effects, an effect operation unit as shown in FIG. An explanation display explaining that various settings and the like can be performed by the operation of 700 is included.

  When the production operation unit 700 is pressed during the customer waiting state, the player setting mode is set, and the player setting mode screen shown in FIG. 61 (c) is displayed. On the player setting mode screen, brightness setting items for adjusting the brightness of LEDs used for volume setting and decoration are displayed as settable items. These items display the current settings. Also, screenshot setting items for displaying saved images, items for exiting the player setting mode and returning to the customer waiting demonstration effect, and explanation of operations on the player setting mode screen are also displayed. Is done.

  The currently selected item is indicated by a cursor that is highlighted so as to surround the item. Here, the cursor is positioned at the item of the screen shot setting. The cursor moves upward by performing a moving operation that touches the front operation point with respect to the center of the production operation unit 700, and moves downward by performing a moving operation that touches the rear operation point with respect to the center. Move to. Then, by performing a determination operation that touches the operation point at the center of the production operation unit 700, the process proceeds to the setting of the item where the cursor is located.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the determination operation touching the central operation point of the rendering operation unit 700 is performed in a state where the cursor is positioned on the screen shot setting item, as shown in FIG. 61 (d). A reduced screen display that displays a list of stored images is displayed. In this reduced screen display, the cursor moves in the vertical and horizontal directions according to the movement operation that touches the front, back, left, and right operation points with respect to the center of the effect operation unit 700. For example, the movement operation that touches the right operation point Is performed, the cursor moves to the right as shown in FIG.

  Then, by moving the cursor to a desired image as shown in FIG. 61 (e) and performing a determination operation that touches the central operation point of the rendering operation unit 700, the cursor is positioned as shown in FIG. 61 (f). It will be a full screen display in which only the image that has been displayed is displayed. In the full screen display, only the selected image is displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and no other decoration display is performed. In addition, the LEDs of the game board 30, the front frame 12, and the glass frame 15 are turned off to be in a state suitable for shooting with a camera. When the full-screen display is being performed, the determination operation that touches the central operation point of the rendering operation unit 700 is performed again to return to the reduced screen display. In the reduced screen display at this time, the cursor is positioned on the image displayed in the full screen display.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the determination operation is performed in a state where the cursor is positioned on an item for setting the brightness of an LED used for volume setting or decoration, the item can be set. In this setting, the value decreases according to an operation touching the left operation point with respect to the center of the rendering operation unit 700, and the value increases according to an operation touching the right operation point.

  FIG. 62 shows an example of setting a gaming machine by an operation of a store clerk in a gaming store. When the production operation unit 700 is pressed twice while waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened, the hall setting mode is entered, and the hall setting mode screen shown in FIG. 62A is displayed. In the hall setting mode screen, as a settable item, it is possible to change the brightness of the LED used for decoration in the player setting mode, and the volume setting for setting the range in which the volume can be changed in the player setting mode. The items of the LED brightness setting for setting the range to be performed, the presence / absence of execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the demonstration effect setting for setting the contents are displayed. Furthermore, items of a liquid crystal luminance setting for setting the luminance of the display device 41, a power saving setting for setting presence / absence of the power saving mode, and a logo color setting for setting a logo display color are displayed. These items display the current settings. In addition, an item of factory setting to return to the factory setting, an item to end the hole setting mode, and an explanation of operations on the screen of the hole setting mode are also displayed.

  The currently selected item is indicated by a cursor that is highlighted so as to surround the item. Here, the cursor is positioned at the demonstration effect setting item, indicating that OFF is selected. ing. OFF is a setting that does not perform the customer waiting demonstration effect in the customer waiting state, and ON is a setting that performs the customer waiting demonstration effect in the customer waiting state, with the cursor positioned on the item of the demonstration effect setting. The setting can be changed by performing a moving operation that touches the left and right operation points of the operation unit 700.

  In addition, although it is set as the setting which does not output an audio | voice in a customer waiting demonstration effect, you may enable it to select the presence or absence of an audio | voice output. When setting to output sound, the sound is output at the volume set in the volume setting. Of course, the volume of the demonstration for waiting for a customer may be set separately. Further, based on the information of the RTC 338, the presence / absence of sound and the volume may be set according to the date and time. For example, it may be possible to set so as to permit the output of sound in the customer waiting demonstration effect only for a predetermined period after the opening of the store.

  In other words, while waiting for a customer, a demonstration for waiting for a customer (such as a game description, description of the content of an effect, movement of an object, voice output, etc.) is performed, but such an effect may interfere with other players' games. However, some players and amusement stores may feel very uncomfortable because it may become noisy even though it is not in operation, but it is possible to set the presence and volume of the voice for the demonstration of waiting for customers By doing so, such a problem can be solved.

  In addition, when it is set to ON for performing the customer waiting demonstration effect, by performing a determination operation that touches the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700 in a state where the cursor is positioned on the item of the demonstration effect setting, You may enable it to set the content of the customer waiting demonstration effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), it is possible to select whether or not to execute each item of customer waiting A, customer waiting B, movie, and game introduction as a customer waiting demonstration effect. Whether or not to execute the item can be switched by moving the cursor by a moving operation that touches the operation point and performing an operation that touches the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700. Further, it may be possible to set the volume and presence / absence of sound for each item of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Next, a screen shot function that allows the image displayed on the display device 41 as described above to be captured and stored by the player's operation, or a change in the setting of the gaming machine based on the operation of the store clerk or player of the game store is performed. Therefore, processing performed in the production control device 300 will be described.

[Screenshot processing]
FIG. 63 shows the screen shot process (step C10) in the main process described above. In this screen shot process, first, it is determined whether there is a screen shot operation (step C251). If there is no screen shot operation (step C251; N), the screen shot process ends. If there is a screen shot operation (step C251; Y), the display data in the current frame buffer is copied (step C252) and saved in the screen shot storage area corresponding to the index counter (step C253). Note that a process of displaying the saved image as a confirmation display 911 in a part of the display area of the display device 41 for a predetermined period is also performed.

  Thereafter, the index counter is updated by +1 (step C254), and it is determined whether the index counter is larger than 14 due to the update (step C255). If it is not greater than 14 (step C255; N), the screen shot process is terminated. If it is greater than 14 (step C255; Y), the value of the index counter is set to 0 (step C256), and the screen shot process is terminated.

  Here, images can be stored in 15 storage areas of index counters 0 to 14, and a maximum of 15 images can be stored. If 15 images have already been saved, the image is saved over the storage area storing the oldest image. Of course, when 15 images have already been stored, it may be possible to select an image to be deleted by the player's selection. Further, an unnecessary image may be selected in advance in the reduced screen display shown in FIG. 61D, and when the new image is stored, the selected image may be overwritten sequentially. Further, the image when the screen shot operation is performed may be once displayed on the display device 41 and stored when there is an operation indicating that the screen shot operation is performed.

  That is, the production control device 300 serves as an input reception unit that receives an operation input of an operation unit (production operation unit 700) that can be operated by the player, and the operation input is performed based on the operation input by the input reception unit. Effect image storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to the effect display image displayed on the effect display device (display device 41) at the same timing.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 64 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C11) in the main process described above. In this hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode is in a state where information is set on the game store side (step C301). When the hall setting mode is in effect, the hall setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the hall setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag. When it is in the hole setting mode (step C301; Y), the process proceeds to step C306. If not in the hole setting mode (step C301; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which information is set (step C302).

  When in the player setting mode, the player setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the player setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag. When the player setting mode is in effect (step C302; Y), the process proceeds to step C320. If not in the player setting mode (step C302; N), it is determined whether the start condition for the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C303). The start condition of the hall setting mode here is, for example, that the effect operation unit 700 is pressed twice while waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened. When the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C303; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C304), and the hole setting mode flag is set (step C305).

  Thereafter, a hall volume adjustment process (step C306) for setting the changeable range of the sound volume based on the operation input and a hall LED brightness adjustment process (step C307) for setting the changeable range of the LED brightness based on the operation input are performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Furthermore, hall demonstration production setting processing for setting a customer waiting demonstration production (step C308), liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing for setting liquid crystal luminance based on operation input (step C309), and transition to a case where the game has not been performed for a predetermined time. A power saving setting process (step C310) for setting the power saving state to be performed based on the operation input is performed. In this power saving setting process (step C310), the setting of whether or not to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time and the volume, LED luminance, and liquid crystal luminance at the time of power saving setting are set for each hole. It can be set to. In addition to the above settings, it may be possible to set whether or not to move the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether there has been a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C311).

  If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C311; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C311; Y), it is determined whether the input is a confirmation operation input at the factory setting (step C312). The confirmation operation input includes a confirmation operation input for confirming information set in the processes from steps C306 to C310, and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which one has been performed.

  When the input is not a finalizing operation input at the factory setting (step C312; N), that is, when the input is a finalizing operation input for determining the information set in the processing from step C306 to C310, the processing from step C306 to C310 The determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM as the determined information as the determined information (step C314). If the input is a deterministic operation input at the factory setting (step C312; Y), the factory setting process (step C313) is performed, and the information set in the processes from step C306 to C310 is discarded and the factory is set. The initial value at the time of shipment is set as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C314). As a result, the initial setting values (volume, LED luminance, and liquid crystal luminance setting values) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323. Thereafter, the end of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C315), the hole setting mode flag is cleared (step C316), and the hole / player setting mode processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the start condition for the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C303; N), it is determined whether the start condition for the player setting mode is satisfied (step C317). Here, the start condition of the hall setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation unit 700 is pressed once during the customer waiting state where the special figure variation display game is not being executed. If this player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C317; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. If the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C317; Y), the player drawing mode screen drawing start is set (step C318), and the player setting mode flag is set (step C319).

  Then, the player volume adjustment process (step C320) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C306), and the change set in the hall LED adjustment process (step C307). A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C321) for changing the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the possible range is performed. Further, a screen shot setting process for performing processing on the image saved by the screen shot operation is performed (step C322). Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C323). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C323: N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

  If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C323: Y), the information set in step C320 or C321 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set. (Step C324), the player setting mode flag is cleared (Step C325), and the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

  In addition, the drawing update setting accompanying the operation input after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C9). Further, the player setting data is stored in the RAM 322, but may be stored in the FeRAM 323. Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power-off time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-on, and the player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power-off time Whether or not to store the hole set value data may be determined. For example, if the power cut-off time is within a predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data, but is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short interruption or error. Then, it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Hall demonstration production setting process]
FIG. 65 shows the hall demonstration effect setting process (step C308) in the above-described hall / player setting mode process. In this hall demonstration effect setting process, it is first determined whether or not the hall demonstration effect setting mode is active (step C331). In the active state, the cursor is positioned at the demonstration effect setting item on the hall setting mode screen shown in FIG. 62A, and the setting can be changed.

  If the hall demonstration effect setting mode is not active (step C331; N), the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. If the hall demonstration effect setting mode is active (step C331; Y), it is determined whether there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C332). If there is no left / right operation of the cursor (step C332; N), the process proceeds to step C337. If there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C332; Y), the demonstration effect setting is updated corresponding to the operation direction (step C333). That is, the demonstration effect setting is switched between ON (execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect) and OFF (not executing the customer waiting demonstration effect).

  Next, in order to make the display of the hall setting mode display correspond to the demonstration effect setting, display setting corresponding to the demonstration effect setting is performed (step C334), the output of the demonstration effect setting is requested (step C335), and the demonstration effect is set. An initial value is set in the setting valid timer (step C336). The demonstration effect setting valid timer is used for measuring a predetermined time for confirming the current selection state without any decision operation.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an up / down operation of the cursor (step C337). If there is no up / down operation (step C337; N), the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. If there is an up / down operation (step C337; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched to active (step C338). Thereafter, display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C339), and the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. Here, the LED brightness setting item is activated when the cursor is operated, and the liquid crystal brightness setting item is activated when the cursor is operated.

[Player volume adjustment processing]
FIG. 66 shows the player volume adjustment process (step C320) in the hall / player setting mode process described above. In this player volume adjustment process, it is first determined whether or not the player volume adjustment mode is active (step C351). In the active state, the cursor is positioned on the volume setting item on the player setting mode screen shown in FIG. 61 (c) and the setting can be changed.

  If the player volume adjustment mode is not active (step C351; N), the player volume adjustment process is terminated. If the player volume adjustment mode is active (step C351; Y), it is determined whether there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C352). When there is no left / right operation of the cursor (step C352; N), the process proceeds to step C357. When there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C352; Y), the player volume value is updated within the effective range corresponding to the operation direction (step C353). The effective range is set in the volume setting in the hall setting mode, and the player can adjust the volume within this range.

  Next, in order to make the display of the player setting mode screen correspond to the player volume value, display setting corresponding to the player volume value is performed (step C354), and the output of the volume switching sound is requested (step C355). Then, an initial value is set in the player volume valid timer (step C356). The player volume valid timer is for measuring a predetermined time for determining the current selection state without any decision operation.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an up / down operation of the cursor (step C357). If there is no up / down operation (step C357; N), the player volume adjustment processing is terminated. If there is an up / down operation (step C357; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched to active (step C358). Thereafter, display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C359), and the player volume adjustment processing is terminated. Here, when the cursor is operated, the item for selecting the end of the player setting mode is activated, and when the cursor is operated, the brightness setting item for adjusting the brightness of the LED is activated.

[Player LED brightness adjustment processing]
FIG. 67 shows the player LED luminance volume adjustment processing (step C321) in the above-described hall / player setting mode processing. In this player LED brightness adjustment process, it is first determined whether or not the player LED brightness adjustment mode is active (step C371). In the active state, the cursor is positioned on the brightness setting item on the player setting mode screen shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the setting can be changed.

  If the player LED brightness adjustment mode is not active (step C371; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. When the player LED brightness adjustment mode is active (step C371; Y), it is determined whether there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C372). If there is no left / right operation of the cursor (step C372; N), the process proceeds to step C376. When there is a left / right operation of the cursor (step C372; Y), the player LED brightness setting value is updated within the effective range in correspondence with the operation direction (step C373). The effective range is set in the LED brightness setting in the hall setting mode, and the player can adjust the LED brightness within this range.

  Next, in order to make the display of the player setting mode screen correspond to the player LED brightness setting value, display setting corresponding to the player LED brightness setting value is performed (step C374), and the player LED brightness setting valid timer is set. An initial value is set (step C375). The player LED brightness setting valid timer is for measuring a predetermined time for confirming the current selection state even if there is no determination operation.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an up / down operation of the cursor (step C376). If there is no up / down operation (step C376; N), the player LED brightness adjustment processing is terminated. When there is an up / down operation (step C376; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched to active (step C377). Thereafter, display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C378), and the player volume adjustment processing is terminated. Here, the volume setting item is activated when the cursor is operated, and the screen shot setting item is activated when the cursor is operated.

[Screenshot setting process]
FIG. 68 shows the screen shot setting process (step C322) in the above-described hall / player setting mode process. In this screen shot setting process, it is first determined whether or not the screen shot setting mode is active (step C401). “Active” means that the cursor is positioned on the screen shot setting item on the player setting mode screen shown in FIG. 61 (c) or a reduced screen display as shown in FIGS. 61 (d) to 61 (e). Or full screen display.

  If the screen shot setting mode is not active (step C401; N), the screen shot setting process ends. If the screen shot setting mode is active (step C401; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting mode has been transferred (step C402). The setting mode is a state in which a reduced screen display or a full screen display is performed as shown in FIGS. 61 (d) to 61 (e).

  If the setting mode has not been transferred (step C402; N), that is, if the cursor is positioned on the screen shot setting item on the player setting mode screen shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step C403). If there is a determination operation (step C403; Y), the reduced screen display is set (step C404), and the screen shot setting process is terminated. If there is no determination operation (step C403; N), it is determined whether there is an up / down operation of the cursor (step C405).

  If there is no cursor up / down operation (step C405; N), the screen shot setting process ends. If there is an up / down operation (step C405; Y), the screen shot setting mode is set to inactive (step C406), and the setting corresponding to the cursor position is set to active (step C407). Here, the brightness setting item is activated when the cursor is operated, and the item for selecting the end of the player setting mode is activated when the cursor is operated. Thereafter, display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C408), and the screen shot setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the setting mode has been shifted (step C402; Y), that is, when the reduced screen display or the full screen display is performed as shown in FIGS. 61 (d) to 61 (e), It is determined whether or not there is a cursor movement operation (step C409). If there is no cursor movement operation (step C409; N), the process proceeds to step C413. Note that the cursor movement operation is not set in the case of full screen display, and in this case as well, the process proceeds to step C413.

  If there is a cursor movement operation (step C409; Y), the selection cursor is moved in accordance with the operation direction (step C410), and display setting corresponding to the moved selection cursor is performed (step C411). Then, an output of the selection cursor moving sound is requested (step C412), and it is determined whether there is a determination operation (step C413).

  If there is no determination operation (step C413; N), the screen shot setting process is terminated. If there is a determination operation (step C413; Y), it is determined whether the full screen is being displayed (step C414). If the full screen is being displayed (step C414; Y), the reduced screen display is set (step C419), and the selection cursor is set to be displayed at the position of the image displayed on the full screen (step C420). The screen shot setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the full screen is not displayed (step C414; N), that is, when the reduced screen is displayed, it is determined whether the selected cursor position is the “return” position (step C415), and the “return” position. If it is (step C415; Y), the customer waiting display setting is performed (step C417), the screen shot setting mode is set to inactive (step C418), and the screen shot setting process is terminated. This completes the player setting mode. If the position of the selected cursor is not the “return” position (step C415; N), the image corresponding to the selected cursor position is set to full screen display (step C416), and the screen shot setting process ends.

  That is, the effect control device 300 displays the effect display image on the effect display device (display device 41) based on the information related to the effect display image stored in the effect image storage means (effect control device 300) at a predetermined timing. The effect image display means which can do is made. In addition, the effect control device 300 serves as a display image selection unit capable of selecting an effect display image to be enlarged and displayed on the effect display device from the effect display images displayed by the effect image display unit. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as an enlargement display means that can enlarge and display the effect display image selected by the display image selection means on the effect display device.

  It should be noted that an initial value may be set in the screen shot setting valid timer when shifting to a reduced screen display or full screen display, and the player setting mode may be terminated when there is no operation for a predetermined time. .

  In the above description, the image at the time when the screen shot operation is performed is stored. However, it is considered that there are many occasions where such a screen shot is performed, such as an effect that is unlikely to appear. Therefore, an image at a timing at which a screen shot is assumed to be stored is stored in advance, and the timing closest to the timing at which the screen shot operation is performed among the images stored at the respective timings as described above. You may make it preserve | save the image of. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the case of an effect in which characters appear one by one, images for each increase in characters are stored in advance, and the timing is based on the image stored according to the timing of the screen shot operation. To save.

  In addition, an image stored by a screen shot operation may be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine so that the player can acquire it with a portable terminal or the like. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a cleaner image than when the player takes a picture with the camera. Further, the stored image may be set as a background image during the game. Further, during a game or waiting for a customer, the stored images may be sequentially displayed on a part of the display area of the display device 41, the sub display device 910, or the like. Further, when a predetermined time elapses in the customer waiting state, all stored images may be cleared.

  Further, not only images but also moving images may be saved. Further, not only the image but also the state of the possible gaming machine when the screen shot operation is performed, the state of the entire gaming machine such as the decoration LED and the lighting state of the effect operation unit 700 are stored, and these states stored in the subsequent operation are stored. It may be reproduced.

  As described above, in a gaming machine that can give a player a game value when a game execution result is a predetermined special result, an effect display device that can perform an effect display related to the game (display) Device 41), control means capable of controlling the effect display device (effect control device 300), operation means operable by the player (effect operation unit 700), and operation input of the operation means. A plurality of pieces of information related to the effect display image displayed on the effect display device at the timing when the operation input is made based on the operation receiving input by the input receiving unit (the effect control device 300) and the input receiving unit. An effect table based on information on the effect image storage means (effect control device 300) and the effect display image stored in the effect image storage means at a predetermined timing. An effect display image that can be displayed on the effect display device from effect image display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the effect display image on the device and the effect display image displayed by the effect image display means. Display image selection means (effect control device 300) capable of selecting the image, and enlarged display means (effect control device 300) capable of magnifying and displaying the effect display image selected by the display image selection means on the effect display device. ).

  In addition, the operation by the operation means includes a first operation capable of intervening in an effect display related to a game executed in the effect display device by performing an operation during a predetermined operation effective period, and a player Can be operated at an arbitrary timing, and includes a second operation (screen shot operation) for storing information related to the effect display image in the effect image storage means. The first operation and the second operation are operations The aspect will be different.

  Next, the display mode of the information display device 800 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 69 shows changes in the display mode as the game progresses. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are configured to be executed in the order in which the start memory is generated. However, FIG. 69 simplifies the description. Therefore, the case where there is no second start memory and the first special figure variation display game is continuously executed will be described.

  Here, there is a first start memory (special figure 1 hold) in a state where the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is started based on this start memory (t11). ). Based on this, the special figure 1 display 51 starts the fluctuation display which blinks with a period of 100 ms. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol LED (L1) displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game on the information display device 800 starts blinking fluctuation display at a cycle of 100 ms. Further, the display device 41 also starts the variable display of the first to third symbols for displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (decorative special figure 1) corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, with the start of the special figure change display game, the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) becomes 0, and the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 (L3) and 2 (L4) are turned off.

  Note that the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) for displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation display game on the information display device 800 is a result mode of the previous second special figure fluctuation display game. Is still displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 (L5) and 2 (L6) are in a display mode corresponding to the second start memory number (the special figure 2 hold number).

  Then, the first start memory is generated during the execution of the first special figure fluctuation display game (t12), and accordingly, the first start memory number becomes 1, and the special figure 1 hold display LED1 is turned on. . After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends and a deviation result is derived (t13), the fluctuation display is stopped on the special figure 1 display 41 and the deviation result mode is displayed. In addition, the 4th design LED of the special figure 1 is turned off to indicate the result of the disconnection, and the 1st to 3rd symbols of the display device 41 are also stopped in the manner of the result of the disconnection.

  At this time, the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off regardless of the first start memory number. Further, the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off regardless of the second start memory number. By doing in this way, it can be made difficult to determine what kind of content each LED of the information display device 800 indicates. In particular, since the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are difficult to understand, the number of start memories cannot be easily grasped, and the stoppage due to the increase of the start memory number can be prevented.

  After that, when the first special figure variation display game based on the first start memory is started (t14), the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED, and the first to third symbols of the display device 41 Fluctuation display is started. In addition, the display of the start memory number on the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 is also started. Here, since the first start memory number is 0, both the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 remain off.

  During the execution of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the first start memory is generated (t15), and accordingly, the first start memory number is 1, and the special figure 1 hold display LED1 is turned on. Further, when the first start memory is generated, the first start memory number is 2 (t16), and the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are turned on. Further, when the first start memory is generated, the first start memory number becomes 3 (t17), the special figure 1 hold display LED1 blinks at a cycle of 128 ms, and the special figure 1 hold display LED2 remains in the lighting state.

  Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game is over and the deviation result is derived (t18), the variation display is stopped and the deviation result mode is displayed on the special figure 1 display 41, and the special figure is displayed. 1 4th design LED will be in the light extinction state which shows the result of detachment, and the 1st-3rd design of the display apparatus 41 will also stop in the result mode of detachment. The special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off.

  After that, when the first special figure variation display game based on the first start memory is started (t19), the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED, and the first to third symbols of the display device 41 Fluctuation display is started. In addition, the display of the start memory number on the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 is also started. Here, since the first start memory number is 2, the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are both lit.

  If the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 are all extinguished (t13, t18) by the stop of the fluctuation display, the next special figure fluctuation display game is started and started. The display of the start memory number in the special figure 1 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 hold display LEDs 1 and 2 is resumed at a predetermined time before the memory decrease timing (t14, t19), and the special figure fluctuation display game is started. It may be possible to recognize that the starting memory number has decreased with time.

  70 and 71 show display modes of the display device 41, the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the information display device 800. FIG. 70 and 71, an example in which the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed alternately will be described. Here, in the decorative special figure start memory display 905 displayed on the display device 41, the first start memory is displayed with a pattern imitating a flag, and the second start memory is displayed with a pattern imitating a peach. I have to.

  The state shown in FIG. 70 (a) is a state in which the second special figure variation display game is executed in a state where there are two first start memories and two second start memories. At this time, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for changing and displaying the first to third symbols in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 903 is executed. In addition, the special display start memory display corresponding to each start memory is displayed in the start memory display area 904, and the start memory corresponding to the special map variable display game currently being executed is changing in the changing memory display unit 906. It is displayed as a memory display 907.

  Further, the special figure 1 display 51 maintains the state in which the result of the previous first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed, and the special figure 2 display 52 is a blinking fluctuation display. Further, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 and 4 symbols LED (L1) for executing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game is the same as the previous first special figure fluctuation display game. The special figure 2 4th symbol LED (L2) which maintains the state in which the result is displayed and executes the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation display game is a blinking fluctuation display. Also, the special figure 1 holding LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) for displaying the first start memory number are both lit to indicate that there are two first start memories, and for displaying the second start memory number. FIG. 2 The hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) are both lit, indicating that there are two second start-up memories.

  After that, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game that has been executed ends, the first to third symbols in the display device 41 change the result mode (here, the result of the loss) as shown in FIG. 70 (b). Display and stop, and the special figure 2 display 52 also displays the result mode (here, the result of the loss) and stops. Further, in the information display device 800, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) maintains the state in which the result of the previous first special symbol fluctuation display game is displayed, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is Then, the result mode (here, the result of dislocation) is displayed and stopped. The special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) for displaying the first start memory number and the special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) for displaying the second start memory number are related to the start memory number. All turned off.

  After the elapse of the predetermined stop time, the first special figure variation display game based on the first start memory having the first digestion order is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG.70 (c), in the display apparatus 41, the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st-3rd symbol is started, and the display of the starting memory | storage display area 904 and the memory display part 906 during fluctuation | variation is updated. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 starts blinking fluctuation display, and the special figure 2 display 52 maintains a state where the result of the previous second special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, the information display device 800 starts the variable display in which the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) blinks, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) displays the result of the previous second special figure variable display game. Keep the displayed state.

  Also, the special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) for displaying the first start memory number and the special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) for displaying the second start memory number are displayed for the start memory number. To start. Here, special figure 1 hold LEDs 1, 2 (L3, L4) are lit only to indicate that there is one first start memory, and special figure 2 hold LEDs 1, 2 (L5, L6) are both lit. In this state, there are two second start memories.

  Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game that has been executed ends, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the first to third symbols in the display device 41 change the result mode (here, the result of disregard). The display is stopped, and the special figure 1 display 51 also displays the result mode (here, the result of loss) and stops. Further, in the information display device 800, the special symbol 1 4th design LED (L1) displays and stops the result mode (here, the result of losing), and the special design 2 4th design LED (L2) The state of displaying the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is maintained. The special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) for displaying the first start memory number and the special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) for displaying the second start memory number are related to the start memory number. All turned off.

  After the elapse of the predetermined stop time, the second special figure variation display game based on the second start memory having the first digestion order is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG.71 (b), in the display apparatus 41, the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st-3rd symbol is started, and the display of the starting memory | storage display area 904 and the memory display part 906 during a change is updated. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 maintains the state in which the result of the previous first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed, and the special figure 2 display 52 starts blinking fluctuation display. Further, in the information display device 800, the special symbol 1 4th symbol LED (L1) maintains the state of displaying the result of the previous first special symbol fluctuation display game, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) blinks. Start the variable display.

  Also, the special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) for displaying the first start memory number and the special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) for displaying the second start memory number are displayed for the start memory number. To start. Here, special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) are lit only in L3 to indicate that there is one first start memory, and special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) are lit only in L5. Thus, there is a state indicating that there is one second start memory.

  Next, the light emission mode of the information display device 800 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the process of clearing the RAM 111C of the gaming control device 100 will be described. FIG. 72 shows a light emission mode of the information display device 800 when the gaming machine is turned on and a light emission mode of the decoration LED provided on the game board 30 or the front frame 12.

When power is supplied to each control device as the gaming machine is turned on (t21), the game control device 100 starts the main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, and the effect control device 300 starts the main process shown in FIG. Is started.
In the production control device 300, until the process of step C7 in the main process is performed, the process of outputting the lighting of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is performed. Thus, it is possible to visually check whether the special pattern 1 4th design LED (L1) and the special design 2 4th design LED (L2) operate normally. At this time, all the decoration LEDs are turned off, so that only the special pattern 1 4th design LED (L1) and the special design 2 4th design LED (L2) are turned on, and the confirmation work becomes easy. The special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L3 and L4) and the special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) may be turned on.

  The lighting state of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is maintained until a command (in this case, a RAM clear command) is transmitted from the game control device 100. In the game control device 100, an activation wait time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for a program of another control device to normally activate after power-on (steps S7 to S12). For this reason, the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 is transmitted after the activation wait time, so that at least the activation wait time, the special figure 1 4th design LED (L1) and the special illustration 2 4th design LED ( The lighting state of L2) is maintained, and the time necessary for the operation status confirmation work is secured.

  When the activation wait time elapses, the game control device 100 performs a process of clearing the RAM, and transmits a RAM clear command to the effect control device 300 (t22). After that, the game can be started by performing necessary processing. In the production control device 300, a process (step C122 in FIG. 45) of outputting the turn-off of the special symbol 4th symbol LED (L1) and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) by receiving the RAM clear command. Then, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) are turned off. Further, in the power-on scenario data setting process (step C125), in order to notify that the RAM clear has been performed, the decoration LED is blinked over the RAM clear notification period (for example, 30 seconds), or the RAM clear is not performed. For example, a process of outputting a sound indicating that the process has been performed is performed.

  During the RAM clear notification period, the game can be executed. Here, the start winning is generated during the RAM clear notification period, and the first start memory or the second start memory is generated (t23). Along with this, the special control variable display game is started in the game control device 100, but the special control variable display game is executed in the special control variable display game to be executed in the special control variable display game 300. Fluctuation display to blink in the four symbol LED (L2) is performed, and the RAM clear notification by blinking the decoration LED or outputting the sound indicating the RAM clear is continued. Then, when the RAM clear notification period ends (t24), the flashing of the decoration LED and the output of the sound indicating the RAM clear are finished, and the decoration operation corresponding to the game being executed is also performed by the decoration LED or the like.

  By doing in this way, the special figure change display game started in the RAM clear notification period is displayed by the player with the special figure change display by the special figure 1 4th design LED (L1) or the special figure 2 4th design LED (L2). The execution of the game can be confirmed, and the RAM clear notification is also performed over the scheduled time, so that the notification can be reliably performed.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment can execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game simultaneously. The above-described configurations such as the screen shot function and the small hitting advance notice can also be applied to the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 74) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the change display game (decoration special view change display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 74). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 74 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32, three general winning ports 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 84).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 84). Further, a second start winning port 37 (start winning port, start winning region) for providing a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball won in the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 84).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a first special that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper prize winning port) 38 is provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 84) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the upper prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the upper winning prize opening and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  An upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 84) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize winning port switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning port is detected by any one of the upper prize winning port switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of upper prize winning port switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening.

  Directly below the first start winning port 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 39 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been. The second special variation winning device 39 includes an opening / closing door 39c that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big prize opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 84) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the lower prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the lower major winning prize opening, and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 84) is arranged inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening. . Also, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right and only a part may overlap vertically. Further, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and other types such as a slide type that can open the grand prize opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big prize opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area By so-called “right-handed”, it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning opening 37 and the first special variable winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed regardless of whether the game ball is fired in the left or right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display for special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) and start memory number notification of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), and left-handed ( The first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) for notifying the player of the right hit (the normal hit) and the right hit (how to hit the game state) that are advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high) of the special figure variation display game A probability display section 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a probability state or a low probability state) is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, the ordinary variation display game is executed as in a conventional gaming machine, and a normal starting point that constitutes a second start winning opening through which the game ball can be awarded based on the specific result of the ordinary variation display game When equipped with a variable winning device, a general map display for displaying a general variable display game, a memory display for notifying the start memory number of a general variable display game, and a lighted time when a short time occurs A short time state notifying unit or the like may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. ), A plurality of LEDs are turned off and turned on (flashing). The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and as shown in FIG. 75 (d), when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, it is selected according to the special result. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the gaming state is advantageous to the player when the left strike is more advantageous than the right strike (when the player strikes normally). When the game state is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (left-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 75 (e), when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), the probability display unit 78 turns off all LEDs, and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change). In the case of (state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 76 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 display 51. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the center segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  77 and 78 show the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display During the fluctuation display of the game, the center segment blinks at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like. Multiple patterns of lighting are set for each of the big hits and small hits, which will be described later, but this does not clearly notify the player of which big hits have occurred, especially when a small hit occurs. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally trying to acquire a game ball at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special figure 2 display 52.

  FIG. 79 shows the probability of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when winning the big hit, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when winning the small hit. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the consecutive accessory operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state in the low probability state and the specific gaming state in the high probability state are respectively shown in the figure. The probability is as shown in 79 (a). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, after the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, it becomes a high probability state, and when a special number variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times), the low probability state is achieved. It is comprised so that it may become. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 79 (b). This small hit probability is higher in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap. Therefore, in the high probability state, either the big hit or the small hit is surely won for Special Figure 2. In addition, you may make it become a loss result.

  FIG. 79 (c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, special variable winning devices and distribution probabilities that are released for each jackpot type, and FIG. 1 and 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened for each type of small hit, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. It should be noted that the 2R probability variation D1 in the special figure 2 can hardly be expected, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 again. In the special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added.

  FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 show the variation pattern of the special map variation display game. FIG. 80A shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed and aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handing. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed according to the player's intention. In addition, depending on the gaming state, the game is designed assuming that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. According to this design, the player plays the game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is advantageous for a player to play a game mainly in one of the special figure variation display games determined to be main in design. In the following description, one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main fluctuation, and the other special figure fluctuation display game may be referred to as irregular fluctuation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is designed as a main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is designated as an irregular fluctuation. In order to allow the player to proceed with the game in accordance with this design, for Special Figure 2, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the game is progressed mainly in the special FIG. 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 80B shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In the high probability state, the variation pattern is not set because the lottery result for the special figure 2 variation display game is not likely to be off. For the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, only one fluctuation pattern is selected. In this high probability state, contrary to the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set as the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set as the irregular fluctuation.

  Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation in a high probability state is a deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation in a low probability state. Is set shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 80A). As will be described later, a short time is set as a fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state, and in the high probability state, a lottery is drawn for the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is no case in which the result of.

  In other words, in the high probability state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game having the result of losing the lottery result is clearly disadvantageous. The game can be progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game to the player without setting a long variable time. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game may not be set longer than necessary. However, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed simultaneously, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is mainly used. In order for the game to proceed, it is forced to stop by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as a sufficiently long fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 81 (a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit may be longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 81 (b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected.

  In particular, for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the second shortest fluctuation time is selected when compared with the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit. ing. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation even in the high probability state stops before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation, and the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game However, the possibility that the result is forcibly removed and changed to a result is reduced. Although the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 2 is performed according to the type of jackpot described above, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 81 (c) shows the fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the low probability state. As for the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected without generating a reach state. FIG. 81 (d) shows the fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected. For the special figure 1 variable display game, the time is the same as in the case of the loss in the high probability state, but this is also forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the loss. It's enough time to be done. In the high probability state, if the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play or a small hit, the fluctuation time should be long enough to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. For example, it may be shorter than the time shown here.

  FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 show the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit (first special result) and the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result). The open / close pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 82 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device for the big hit type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variation display game, and FIG. The open / close pattern of the special variable prize-winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 82, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the big hit type is a big hit of 16R probability variation A1, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the big prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1. . In the special prize 1 upper winning opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open / close pattern shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 is a time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The other open / close patterns are a fanfare period, an open period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable winning device is accordingly constructed. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 in FIG. 83 shown in FIG. 83 is configured by opening a 27200 ms opening period in 5R, repeating a 200 ms opening and a 1500 ms closing 11 times, and then performing a 25000 ms opening. Also, in any open / close pattern, when a predetermined number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening / closing pattern is the same from the start of the special game state to the middle, as shown in the special figure 1 top prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing patterns 2 and 3, The effects in the device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the big hit type or the small hit type. Further, during the special gaming state, information suggestion or notification that enables discrimination of the big hit type or the small hit type may be performed.

  In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special figure 2, the effect of whether or not the long open round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is provided. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is opened, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is completed. In FIG. 2, after the short opening which is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special prize opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 described above is performed, the long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter, the same long opening as the 4R is resumed. . Therefore, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is used, the time from 5R to 15R is used, and if the special winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 is used, the time between the multiple short openings of 5R is used. If the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is continued, the result that the long opening is not resumed (the big hit game does not continue) is notified. By notifying the result that the long release is resumed (the big hit game is continued), the player may be given a sense of expectation.

  From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). In addition, when the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the small hit are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, wins the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 84).

  A winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special FIG. 1 variable display game by a start opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Is stored in the limit. When the game ball wins the first start winning slot 36 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory number is decremented by 1. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and one first start memory is stored. . When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  A winning ball to the second starting winning port 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. Even if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory is not generated. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning at the second starting winning opening 37, the second starting memory is generated once for convenience of processing. Since it is immediately digested, the second start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 84). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the start display number storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first fluctuation display device) based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Based on the winning in the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 display game is performed by the special figure 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (out-of-order result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display form as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the predetermined result form is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (a big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special gaming state (so-called big hit state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special gaming state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first fluctuation display means capable of displaying a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second fluctuation display means capable of displaying a second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37.

  In response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game includes a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Displayed in the display area. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 displays a decoration variation display game in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) ( A decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration special map variation display game) is provided. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits, but in the normal game state that is in a low probability state, the fluctuation time is as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. A very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal gaming state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at winning a small hit in the normal gaming state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to make a left turn and aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. Although the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  When the big hit occurs and the special gaming state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed. In addition, when the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 39 is open | released in the special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it can aim at right-handed or left-handed. After the special gaming state based on the big hit, the specific gaming state is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 2 variable display game by making a right turn and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device based on the small hits and the special variable winning device based on the big hits occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, Based on the number of starting memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected from a plurality of variation pattern tables and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start prize port 37. A plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper prize port switches 38a and second special variable prize device 39 disposed in the switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the first special variable prize device 38. An interface chip that is connected to the lower major prize opening switch 39a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a are detected by the second input port 123. Is input. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close data of an upper large prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 and a lower large prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39. Is output. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the upper large prize opening solenoid 38b and the lower large prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a third driver 138c that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Four drivers 138d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper prize port switch The non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Called switch). In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, on the basis of the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning port 37, the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted to the second RAM 111C. Store the starting memory. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, can open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the top big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the top big prize opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the lower big prize winning solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the lower big prize winning opening.

  Then, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the low probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 90 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 86, first, a stack pointer which is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt is generated after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) is set. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 87, and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 87 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step X21 of FIG. 87, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After that, a command at the time of power failure restoration corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22). Proceed to X28. In this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are displayed. And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step X28, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) An initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X30), and an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle. The big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X33). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step X32 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X36), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step X39). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shuts down. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 88 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 89 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. In addition, when the signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) for performing (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed.

  Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37. And the special figure 1 game process (step X110) which performs the process regarding a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) which performs the process regarding a special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that performs processing to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board, and board fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, external information editing processing (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area (Save) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step X151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second readings is 0, and a different bit is 1 (step X152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 84) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is acquired (step S163). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are synthesized (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output for external information output. Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X191). Return to Step X188.

  As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indefinite state means that the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period in a state indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, leading to a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) that performs payout control of the ball, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Based on (busy signal), a control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Is output In response to the fact that the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a payout control for performing game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control with a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball containing information about And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is configured so that the status signal output from the payout control means is a payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 95 shows random number update processing 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 90). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Set to a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 96 shows random number update processing 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 90). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and proceeds to step X239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 97 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 90). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper large winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step X301). The illegal & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal winning number area, and an illegal winning error. Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning mouth switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower large winning opening switch 39a in the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (Step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and a gaming machine state check for judging a state such as an error has occurred. Processing (step X315) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 98 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-described prize opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on each of the two upper big prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the door and inserting the game ball and paying out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target winning port switch is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the switch is the lower large prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step X325).

  The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the determined number is not exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 6326). X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the error-monitoring prize opening switch is one of the upper prize-winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the error monitoring target prize-winning opening switch is the other upper prize-winning opening switch 38a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that when the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize port switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step X339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step X340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 99 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, the change in input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

  When the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). If all the switches have been monitored (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 100 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 101 shows the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state, but the player who does not know this. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for informing such a player to make a left strike is performed.

  In this special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag. Determination is made (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be zero. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. In determining whether there is the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387), if there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X389). 2. It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not smaller than the prescribed value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is kept at the prescribed value (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer has an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player makes a right-hand hit and the player makes a right-hand hit even though it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to advance the game mainly by the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 shows a case where a variable display game is being executed, and a process for notifying the player to make a left strike is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. When the time is up (step X396; Y), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (step X397), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (step X399). If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are the same (step X399; Y), that is, if there is no state change, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. (Step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processing of steps X402 and X403 is performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 along with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is issued along with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification will be set.

  FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 show an example of the processing by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 102, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15 in the normal gaming state. When the next special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 fluctuation number changes from 15 to 16. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by one (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. The Similarly, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value 18 (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 3 to 2, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to zero. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted every time a specified number (18 times here) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

  FIG. 103 shows a case where special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value of 5.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the output of external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, The occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation can be grasped by the management device of the amusement store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice.

  Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the abnormal fluctuation notification timer in the special figure 2 is started (t22), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. If the special figure 2 variable display game is newly started before the lapse of the predetermined time, the measurement of the predetermined time is newly started from that point.

  Thus, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally. Thus, when the second start winning opening 37 is won, it is possible to prevent immediately from determining that there is an abnormal fluctuation in the special figure 2. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation which occurred about the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 which is not intended because the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the predetermined number of times was made to be subtracted. The number is canceled if a game is subsequently played, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or a result of another player's game from accumulating and determining that there is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  Note that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number for performing the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 104 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312 and X315) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 105 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y) The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

  When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the low probability is in effect (step X494). And when it is in low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure start port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is performed by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the high probability state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and the big hit random number is calculated based on the winning to the second starting winning port 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when acquired (step X501).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening prize presence information is set based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. If the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit, that is, the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the jackpot (step X503).

  If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not a big hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether a high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When this high probability final change is being performed (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the high probability final change is not being performed (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), special chart start port 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated.

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to left-hand is displayed by display or voice. When the player is in the low probability state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player. A left-handed instruction notification is performed.

  In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for some types of jackpots, so that the left-handed instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed last in the high probability state, the game is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so the low probability state is in the game. Since the determination is made in the probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur. In addition, since the specific game state is produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 107 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 108 shows the special view start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the start port switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the number of times of starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, looping by +1 update results in 0, so the updated value is not saved.

  When the special figure 1 holding number is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of the variation pattern in the special figure holding information determination process described later is set ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is used as the RWM big hit random number. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit design random number is extracted and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is a pre-read process, is performed to prepare a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step X535), and an effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and store the predetermined random number as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. A first start storage means is provided.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 109 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step X541). If it is in a high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . If not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not the big special hit state, that is, the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If it is a big hit (step X542; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not being hit (step X542; N), a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not (step X547). ). If the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information for the outage is set (step X550), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), an effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation number indicating the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game are prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process. It is the same.

  By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether big hit or small hit or variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is used as the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game starts. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before the timing.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. A possible first determination means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  This special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Also, the prefetch process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed from the special figure derived by the special figure 2 variable display game. It is because it is almost stopped at. In other words, because most of them are out of date, it is not meaningful to notify the pre-reading result, or after the pre-reading result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game is notified, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-order result. This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. There is a high possibility that only the display game is played. In such a case, a pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the specific gaming state, so the results are used to determine what occurred after the start of the specific gaming state. The prefetching process is performed on the target of such prefetching effects. Of course, the prefetch process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform a prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 110 shows the special view start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the start port switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the second start winning port 37, is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (second start winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

  The start port 2 winning is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during special figure display processing described later), in the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special drawing start port 2 switch process is terminated. If the start port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the second start winning opening 37. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 111 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state that is executed based on whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 2 is in effect (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. The small hitting fanfare process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 112 shows special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-described timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed based on whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 is not big hit / small hit (step Y131; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the special figure 2 game processing timer repeated 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The variation timer value (here 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing a special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of occurrence in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 Special processing (step Y139) for performing setting of information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y139). When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, A special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process The small hitting fanfare process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 113 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the top prize winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is in progress (step Y162). It should be noted that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both large winning opening remaining ball processing based on big hits and small hit remaining ball processing based on small hits.

  When the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is not in progress (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the big winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y164).

  It should be noted that during the opening in steps Y161 and Y163, the special game state based on the first special result (big hit), the special game state based on the first special game state, and the second special result (small hit). Including both being released in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set. You may make it determine based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When there is an input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), the process proceeds to Step Y175.

  On the other hand, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (one upper prize winning switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a big winning mouth count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper large prize opening switch 2 (the other upper big prize opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the number of winning prizes (step Y178), and it is determined whether the number of winning prizes is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the game is being released in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  When the big hit is not being released (step Y182; N), that is, when the big hit is being opened, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the big hit is being released (step Y182; Y), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

  It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164; Y), the prize winning count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, if there is a remaining ball process for the lower major prize opening, a special prize count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch during the remaining ball process. Anyway.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 114 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit to the end of the special gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 1 is not ready to be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when a special figure variation display game that was last performed in a specific gaming state that is in a high-probability state is finished, and thereby a normal gaming state that is in a low-probability state A left-handed instruction notification will be performed when moving to.

  If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and a special figure special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status area is set (information addition) during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is being reached (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final variation is in progress (step Y214). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 115 shows the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the second starting prize opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. The special figure 2 is generated temporarily to start the variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step Y227). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y237.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 116 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game and Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small win) is derived, the other is forcibly disregarded regardless of the lottery result As a result, it ends. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game always has a big hit or a small hit, when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, such a process is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, for example, in spite of a highly anticipated effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the result of the loss, and the player has a distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started, it is possible to take measures such as preventing an effect with high expectation from being selected. I am doing so.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y248). If the state is in a high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of a high probability state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and frequently executed, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of detachment. In the special figure 1 variable display game, since a highly anticipated effect is preset so as not to be selected, no special processing is performed here.

  If not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game having high probability final fluctuation is stopped in a short time, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game started from now is highly likely to be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it ends before the start of the effect, so here a process for preventing the effect with a high degree of expectation from being selected. Do not do.

  If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250). If the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since it is in a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from now on, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a very long fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped, the process for preventing the highly anticipated performance from being selected is not performed here.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, so that a highly expected production is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 fluctuation display to be executed from now on. It is determined whether the game variation time is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, the process for preventing the production with the high expectation is not selected.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256). After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of the high probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs processing such as restricting selection of a highly expected effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. To do.

  When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) is set. Processing for resetting information related to the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed to change the variation control pattern so that the production control device 300 does not select a production with a high expectation. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) for preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed in the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. First variation mode determination means is provided that can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process for resetting the variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information regarding the variation pattern can be obtained without changing the variation time of the first variation display game that has been determined. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be determined again.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when a special result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result. The process (step Y254) which determines whether it is less than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 2 fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, and this process is unnecessary.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 117 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of high probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that can be executed simultaneously is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with few results. However, similarly to the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, the selection of the production with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 118 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed to determine whether or not.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 279) is a small hit (step Y 280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y 271 and saved. (Step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 119 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the lost information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 120 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in a high probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). .

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 121 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and not more than the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. In addition, the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery is lost. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 information is being set, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being determined. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the judgment is for the special figure 2 variable display game, a small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 122 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game stop symbol is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol. A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y340). Next, a special symbol 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in the special symbol 1 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and an effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The small symbol symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 123 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). If it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special symbol 2 variable display game stop symbol is saved not in the special graphic 2 stop symbol area but in the special graphic 2 stop symbol save area when a special result is derived in the special graphic 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped for the special symbol 2 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y375), and a special decoration figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and an effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 124 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not found (step Y404; N), it is judged whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If the special figure 1 is not small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 is small (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data. The value is converted by addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not the big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the high probability probability special figure 1 deviation / small hit is set (step Y409), and the special figure 1 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y411). In the case of special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit is set (step Y410), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

  That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the special figure 1 holding number is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a loss In the case of the first half variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number, and in the case of big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 125 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), The process proceeds to step Y428.

  On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the low-probability special figure 2 is set for the first half offset data for losing / small hits (step Y425), and the special figure 2 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y427). In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and latter half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429), and the special figure 2 information is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
FIG. 126 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of sync, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte sorting process is performed. (Step Y455), the process proceeds to Step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not shifted (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes to enable a variety of effects.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. Preparation is made (step Y464).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
FIG. 127 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, a sorting process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y479). ).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is terminated. The first half variation pattern is set by this processing, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of variation in the latter half, the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 without selecting the latter variation group by the variation pattern random number 1.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 128 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), the first sorting value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 129 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, one of the latter-half variation number and the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the special figure 1 change start process and the special figure 2 change start process described above. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for the hold number 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

  Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (step Y559).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-described addition value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as the addition value except for the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions that is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms). It has come to be.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is set when the result is out of play or a small hit in the normal game state for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is determined by the set fluctuation pattern number.

  If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. If it is the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ) Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the variation start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information on the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. The first determination means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where a game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the second start winning opening 37 is fired to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination unit is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination unit. It will be a long time.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination unit. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state which is in a low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. Information about time may not be transmitted to the production control device 300, but a command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is sufficient to simply display the variation, and there is no need to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command indicating the long variation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and when the variation time ends, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 stops the variable display based on receiving the stop command. Like that. If it does in this way, the burden of control in production control device 300 can be eased.

[High probability change count update processing]
FIG. 131 shows the high-probability fluctuation number update process (steps Y257 and Y268) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y581), and if not high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the probability is high (step Y581; Y), the high probability variation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability variation count is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step Y583).

  If the high probability variation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is to be ended, a signal related to high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to be OFF. Further, a signal related to the high probability state and the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol for which variation starts is set (step Y588), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are performed. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If it is a gaming machine that does not execute one special figure fluctuation display game while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed as in the prior art, the probability state is not changed until the predetermined special figure fluctuation display game is finished. There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined special figure variable display game. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made with a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game which is the predetermined number of times is displayed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to be in a low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the start processing for one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is finished. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability variation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is changed. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the processing is performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special probability variation display game is set with a high probability final variation flag so that it can be handled as a game executed as a high probability state. In addition, the high probability final variation flag is information that can determine whether the last special diagram variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is a special diagram 1 variation display game or a special diagram 2 variation display game. Is included.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Moreover, the lighting mode at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation by the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same, and may differ.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 134 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, and therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 1 is set. If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. In the case of a high probability final change (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of outage, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit if it is not a high probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. In the case of a high probability final variation, a display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step Y631). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of the detachment based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y631; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y640), whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If the special figure is a small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening information area and saved in the large winning opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 135 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 2 is set.

  If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In the case of a high probability final variation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not a high probability final fluctuation, and regardless of the result if it is a high probability final fluctuation. A display time of 7000 ms is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of step (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. When the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 display process is not in progress (step Y661; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y665), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a special decoration figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y670), whether the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If the special figure 2 is a small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not a small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and saved in the big prize opening information area (step Y673).

  After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 136 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 137 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 138 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y704).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting a result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 big opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the shift symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 139 shows the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big winning opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y730), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

  Through the processes in FIGS. 134 to 139 described above, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped by the result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment, and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined to have the special result. Based on this, the second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation is performed.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game for which execution control is performed Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control means is executed by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game being controlled has a special result, the second variation display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variation display game, the other variation display game can be forcibly stopped by the result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
140 and 141 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755). If it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. In the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The medium signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y760). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper prize winning opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the illegal extra monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y769; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y772), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if Special Figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if big hit flag 1 is out of place information, it is determined whether loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y778).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If the final variation is high probability (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether a high probability is in progress (step Y787).

  When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning apparatus 39), an illegal winning of the lower large winning opening is performed. The number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display mid-process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery in a high probability state is performed. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y803). If it is during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the special figure 2 is not in a small hit (step Y803; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. The number is saved (step Y805). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure status 1 is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
142 and 143 show the special figure 2 display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y815). If it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Also, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y817), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big win in the special winning opening information and the special figure changing display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y830), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper university winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y829; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y832), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit at step Y815 (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is missing information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y838).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

  When the probability is not high (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39), the illegal winning of the lower large winning opening The number area is cleared (step Y855), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 mid-display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If it is during the small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the small hit in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y863; N), a signal related to the left hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left handed state. The number is saved (step Y865). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure 2 fluctuation is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. .

  That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is released with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has reached the first special result. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has a second special result. Make.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 144 describes details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (steps Y776 and Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 display process and special figure 2 display process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-short state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), and the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated. That is, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared with the occurrence of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 145 shows the special chart 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-described special chart 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hitting display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure one small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 146 shows the special process 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 147 shows fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y955). As an initial value for the big hit processing control pointer, 0 is set when opening and closing is repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of 16R probability variation F3 (special drawing 2 top winning opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous release in one round, 21 is set as the jackpot operation end value. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the winning opening opening time corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the big prize opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y963). Whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening can be determined from the set big opening opening information. If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting process 1 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. Further, when it is not a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the process during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 148 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step Y964). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, a signal related to the opening of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning port on-data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the big winning port is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y973), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 149 shows the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step Y965). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, a signal related to the opening of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y983), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 150 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112, Y143) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the big winning opening opening process, first, the big hit processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). Then, the process for opening the big prize opening is finished. In this case, opening / closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the jackpot action end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the winning ball remaining ball processing is set as the process number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open process is terminated. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
FIG. 151 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-described process during opening of the big prize opening. In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and a process for closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big winning opening time, 200 ms is set, and when it is 21, 25000 ms is set. Next, the top prize winning port on-data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, only the top prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round. Therefore, in step Y1024, on data is saved for the top prize winning solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, it may be possible to repeat the opening and closing of the lower large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit action transition setting process is terminated. With the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big prize opening in one round.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
FIG. 152 shows the big winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the process number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000 ms, and the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like in this interval period. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), a big hit end process transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the process number (step Y1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms. Is executed.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 153 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal related to the end of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y1072), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step Y1075), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 154 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 ordinary process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol fluctuation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  After that, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interruption process, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the process, a special interrupt process that starts the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game process by the timer interruption that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end process. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area, so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

  In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. A game process standby means is provided for preventing the execution of the process relating to the start of the two-variable display game.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 155 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game process described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end process is equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process except that step Y1117 is not performed.

  First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, a probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the special figure 2 jackpot ending process is ended.

  By these special figure 1 big hit process and special figure 2 big hit process, the specific game state which is a high probability state is set until 50 special figure variation display games are executed after the first special game state is finished. . In other words, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than the normal state over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. Further, the specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific game state, compared to the normal state.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 156, in this small hitting fanfare process, first, branching is performed using an open pattern (step Y1201).

  In step Y1201, if the opening pattern is 1 per bonus (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) opening small hitting opening command is prepared. (Step Y1202), an effect command setting process is performed (Step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is 2 in small hits (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is issued. Preparation (step Y1209) and an effect command setting process are performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is 3 in small hits (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hitting opening command for opening the upper prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is issued. Preparation (step Y1216) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1218), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  In addition, if the opening pattern is 4 in small hits (special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the top hitting opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) opening small hits opening command is issued. Preparation (step Y1223) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the top winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these types of small hits, the big prize count area for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 157 shows the small hit / medium process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hitting process, first, a small hitting end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1243).

  In step Y1243, if the opening pattern is 1 for small hits (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the processing number (step Y1244). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 2 per small hit (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step Y1248). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 3 or 4 per small hit in step Y1243 (special winning opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in Special Figure 2), 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball process (step Y1252). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing ends.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 158 shows the small hit remaining ball process (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). When the special figure 1 is a small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y1272), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 small hit process (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 159 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1304). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1307). If the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), Special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Again, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interruption process. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 160 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as a process number for the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1338). If the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 161 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 162 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50, a round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) Unit 60, first game state display unit 77 for notifying the player of the left strike (normal strike) and right strike, which is advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified are made.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is obtained to obtain a segment. Save in the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display mode in the probability display unit 78 is defined (step X605), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 163 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step X613).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Note that if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), a production command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 164 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If not, a command to terminate board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X637), a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X639).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), an effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 165 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information. The output data area is saved (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is displayed. The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process goes to step X711. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  And, magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), big prize opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), The security data on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the gaming machine error status signal on-data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a start port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first start winning port 36 (step X720) and a start port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the second start winning port 37 (step X721). Do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 166 shows start port 1 signal editing processing (step X720) in the above-described external information editing processing. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X838), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above is performed for the start port 2 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 167 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the external information editing process described above. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 168 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the above-described external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

  If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (256 ms in this case) of the symbol determination number signal (in this case, high level) and the time (in this case, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). It is time (here 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the on-state time is 256 ms and the off-state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the symbol determination frequency signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, game effects will be described. FIG. 169 shows a display example on the display device 41. These display controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in the normal gaming state. In the upper right part of the display area, a game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided. Here, a “normal stage” signifying a normal gaming state is displayed. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, ◯ and-are used as identification information, and these are alternately displayed in the variable display, and after that, in the case of a special result, ◯ is displayed, and in the case of a loss,-is stopped and displayed. Display the game.

  At the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are four first start memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  An in-execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start-up memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 1 variable display game is provided at the lower center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83. In the in-execution memory display portion 84, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the memory display portion 83 is shifted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode.

  FIG. 169 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in a specific game state. In the upper left part of the display area, there is provided a game number information display unit 85 showing information on the number of games in a specific gaming state. “LAST” displays the number of remaining games that can be executed in a specific game state, and “TOTAL” displays the number of games executed in a series of specific game states.

  Although the numerical value on the display in the game number information display unit 85 does not necessarily match the actual number of games, the actual number of games is managed inside the production control device 300, and Based on this, the display contents on the game number information display unit 85 are set. The effect control device 300 manages the information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state every time the decoration special figure variation display game is executed, and the display content on the game number information display unit 85 is this information. Is set based on.

  On the right side of the game number information display section 85, a game mode display section 80 for displaying the game state is provided. Here, “pounding RUSH” indicating that the game state is normal is displayed. On the right side of the game mode display unit 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 for notifying that right-handed is advantageous for the player is made. On the right side of the right-handed instruction display 86, a memory display unit 83 and a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 are provided. Here, the first start memory number is indicated by a number. Further, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the memory display unit 83 may not be displayed when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed.

  Below the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81, an acquired number display section 87 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a series of specific game states is provided. In the number-of-acquisition display section 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1pt, which indicates that 1234 prize balls have been obtained. Further, in the center of the display area, the number of winning balls is displayed based on the winning to the special variable winning device, and is added to the acquired number display section 87.

  In the acquired number display section 87, the special game state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state from the start of the special game state to the start of the specific game state until the end of the series of specific game states. The number of prize balls won in the period from the start of the game to the fall in the low probability state by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times without the first special result being derived during the specific gaming state is displayed. During this period, it is added as needed every time a prize ball is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them is displayed. You may do it. Further, only the number of winning balls based on winning in the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, The number of winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. The display position of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is the same as the normal gaming state. In addition, an effect symbol display unit 88 that displays an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation display game is provided at the lower center of the display area. The effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and then the effect symbols corresponding to the special symbol variation display game are displayed. It should be noted that the change and stop of the effect design do not necessarily correspond to the change and stop of the special figure change display game. This effect symbol can be executed at the same time, and the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are forcibly stopped due to the result of the other being out of play as a special result. It is intended to make it easier for the person to understand.

  In other words, the effect control device 300 constitutes a receiving means capable of receiving control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, a decoration variation display game (decorative display) (1 variation display game and decoration special figure 2 variation display game) execution control means capable of performing execution control is made. In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) in the specific gaming state. Subtracting means for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time. Also, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the subtraction number of the subtracting means that the plurality of effect identification information is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in a specific gaming state without corresponding to the execution of the decoration variation display game. The display identification information fluctuation display means can be executed. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a game number information notifying unit capable of notifying the game number information which is information corresponding to the subtraction result by the subtracting unit.

  FIG. 170 shows the execution of the special map variation display game and the decoration special map variation display game, and the change in display of the effect symbol and game number information display unit 85. FIG. 171 shows the display on the display device 41. It was. In the ending period (t31) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 170, notification that the specific game state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 171 (a), and the specific game is displayed in the game number information display section 85. The remaining number of games that can be executed in the state (50 times) is displayed.

  Here, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 170, the special figure 1 variable display game is started with the end of the first special game state, and the decorative special figure is displayed. A one-variable display game is also started (t32). Further, with the end of the first special gaming state, the game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started (t32). . That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. Although it is shown here that it is started at the same time, in actuality, since the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed after the end of the special gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. After the game is started, the special figure 2 variable display game is started.

  This special figure 2 variable display game ends (t35) before the scheduled end time (t37) of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result is a small hit. For this reason, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss (t35).

  Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only with the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variable display game at the same time. There is a risk that it may be difficult for a player accustomed to to understand the progress of the game. Therefore, by using an effect design that displays the progress of the game by a display like a conventional game machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game, the number-of-games information display section 85 is changed in accordance with the progress of the effect design. Makes it easy to keep track of the progress of the game.

  First, accompanying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect symbol display unit 88 starts to display the effect symbols in a variable manner. Accordingly, the number-of-games information display unit 85 sets the number of remaining games (LAST) to 49 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) to 1 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed, and the specific gaming state is started after the end of the first special gaming state. The number of executed games is one. When the special game state occurs in the specific game state, the specific game state is continuous, and thus becomes a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of executed games before the start of the special game state.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (b), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbols is maintained as it is, and the display content of the game number information display unit 85 does not change. In the figure, ◯ and-are displayed simultaneously to show a variable display, but actually, ◯ and-are alternately displayed to perform a variable display. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the display contents of the effect symbols is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 170, the effect design that is currently being displayed by this change is stopped before the end of the change time of the special figure 2 change display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 171 (c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that it is off. At this time, only the design symbols are stopped, and the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game remain variably displayed.

  In addition to the stop symbol indicating that it is out of place, the stop symbol of the effect design at this time suggests or informs that a special result will be derived at the next stop as “NEXT” or “attention”, etc. Also good. Further, as a variation pattern of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, a revariation display for starting the fluctuation display again after a temporary stop in a result aspect other than the special result aspect in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game. When a so-called pseudo-continuous variation display mode that is performed once or more can be executed, an effect at the time of stopping or resuming the effect design may be the same as the temporary stop or re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous variation display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation display of the effect design is started again (t34). At this time, the display of the game number information display unit 85 is updated, the remaining game number (LAST) becomes 48, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 171 (d)). Then, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stopped, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 171 (e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game also stop the fluctuation display and display the result mode.

  Thus, by changing the setting of the display pattern of the effect symbols, the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed in the same display manner as a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time. That is, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t32), the effect symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner until the scheduled stop of the special figure 1 variable display game (t37), and then stopped and displayed once. Although it was scheduled to show that the game was played, the setting of the display contents of the effect symbols is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game thereafter (t32). In this change, before the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is temporarily stopped (t33), and then the fluctuation is started again (t34), and is changed to stop at the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t35). Yes. In other words, the effect symbols are stopped according to the number of subtractions (here, 2) by the subtracting means from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation display game that triggered the effect symbol variation start. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170, the second special gaming state is started and the first special variation winning device 38 is released. As shown in 99 (f), in the special gaming state, the number of winning balls is displayed as a result of winning the special variable winning device, and is added to the earned number display portion 87. After that, when the second special game state ends, the special figure variation display game can be executed (t38). The game proceeds from t38 to t39 and t39 to t40 in the same manner as t32 to t38 described above.

  In addition, when there is no first start memory and only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect symbols are simultaneously with the fluctuation and stop of the special figure 2 variable display game (t40 to t41). . In addition, even when only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect design are simultaneous with the fluctuation and stop of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed at the same time and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is finished first, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is obtained. If it is off, the special design 1 variable display game is stopped and the effect design is stopped and the variable display is performed again. In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of losing, so the production symbol is stopped before the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. Then, the variable display is performed again, and is stopped when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the decoration variation display game (decoration special map variation display game) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game in the specific gaming state. Subtracting means (effect control device 300) for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times, and in the specific game state, a plurality of pieces of effect identification information (effect And a production identification information variation display means (production control device 300) that can be executed in accordance with the number of subtractions of the subtraction means, and the production identification information fluctuation display. The means changes the decoration corresponding to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the second variation display game having a special result in the specific gaming state. When the display game ends, the number of change displays and stop displays corresponding to the first change display game and the second change display game are displayed by the end, and subtraction by the subtracting means is performed for each change display game. This can be notified to the player.

  Further, the effect identification information variation display means is configured so that the decoration variation display game corresponds to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the second variation display game having a special result. When the game ends, a variable display corresponding to the first variable display game is displayed before the end and a stop display is performed. Thereafter, a variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed, and then the second variable display is displayed at the end. The stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

  Next, the control for the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are simultaneously executed, as shown in FIG. 172, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with the special result first as shown in FIG. 172 (c), the effect in the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and the result is forced Will be stopped. In order to avoid such a state, when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to notify that the special figure 1 variable display game is longer, it produces a highly expected effect. I do not do it.

[Direction lottery processing]
FIG. 173 shows an effect lottery process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the variation pattern received from the game control device 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether the variation pattern is capable of executing a premier effect that is a highly expected effect (step Z12). . If the variation pattern is not capable of executing the premier effect (step Z12; N), the effect lottery process is performed (step Z15), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In the effect lottery process, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected according to the variation pattern received from the game control device 100.

  If the variation pattern is such that the premier effect can be executed (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether a command notifying that the variation time of FIG. 1 is longer is received (step Z13). When the command notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In this case, since the situation as shown in FIG. 172 may occur, the specific pattern is selected for the premier effect. The specific pattern will be described later.

  Further, when the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Z13; N), the premier effect lottery process is performed (step Z14), and the normal effect lottery process (step Z15). To finish the effect lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, the presence / absence and type of the premier effect (special effect) is selected. When it is determined to execute the premier effect, the type is determined, and the determined premier effect becomes the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal production lottery process is not performed. If it is determined not to execute the premier effect, a variation pattern other than the premier effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, whether or not the premier effect lottery is performed may be varied depending on whether or not the result is a special result, and the probability of winning the premier effect when the lottery is performed may be varied.

  FIG. 174 shows an example in which the specific pattern is not set because the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ends before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state as shown in FIG. 174 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 174 (b). In this case, a premier effect can be set. In this example, the premier effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 174 (c) and (d).

  Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has a special result (here, a big hit), as shown in FIG. 174 (e), as the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ends, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost. Forced to stop at the result. When the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play, the special figure 2 variable display game is not forcibly stopped.

  FIG. 175 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 175 (b). The special figure 2 variable display game being executed ends earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, and has a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing, a specific pattern is set.

  This specific pattern is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) of a predetermined time in which no reach state is generated. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not end even after this fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 175 (c), the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed in a temporarily stopped state so as to be shaken by the result. Become. If the special figure 2 variable display game is finished before the fluctuation time elapses, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped at that time.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is ended with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as shown in FIG. 175 (d). After this, the second special game state is entered, and after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory as shown in FIG. 175 (e).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 175 (b), the period during which the identification symbol is variably displayed at a high speed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set to the time from the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game to a predetermined time, and always. You may make it pass through the state of FIG. 175 (c).

  In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, the specific pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first and the first special result is obtained. Anyway. FIG. 176 shows a display example in this case. 176 (a) to (c) are the same as FIG. 174. Thereafter, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops in the result form of the first special result and the special figure 2 variable display game ends. The first special gaming state is entered. By enabling such an effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the specific pattern.

  Note that the specific pattern as shown in FIG. 176 is also set when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game can be selected and the special figure 2 variable display game stops first due to the result of the deviation. It is possible. In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is an outlier result, the premium lottery process (step Z14) may be executed even when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first.

  In the above-described effect lottery process for determining the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, the premier effect lottery The process (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result in the normal gaming state than the longest fluctuation time set when the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the shortest variation time to be set is longer. By doing in this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the premier effect is set, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped first. Does not occur.

  It should be noted that a countermeasure other than the above may be considered as a countermeasure for the case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. For example, as described in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 116, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N ), A process for resetting the fluctuation pattern may be performed in addition to or instead of the process for preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is longer (step Y255). .

  In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 is changed to a variation pattern in which the premium effect cannot be selected, it is not a variation pattern in which the premium effect can be executed in the process of FIG. 173 (step Z12; N) As a result, the premier production is not selected. Also, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, it is possible to change the variation pattern so as to select the specific pattern so that the specific pattern is always selected. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when a special result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result. The process (step Y254) which determines whether it is less than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 2 fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, and this process is unnecessary.

  Further, as another example of coping with the case where the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the special result being derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, for example, FIG. In the normal game state in which the variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 1 variable display game may be treated as an advantage, and the process may be advanced so that the special figure 1 variable display game progresses advantageously.

  When performing such processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 116, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( In step Y254; N), instead of the processing of steps Y225 and Y226, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result. If the result is a special result, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined. A process of changing the time so that the time becomes less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the special result which should have been derived | led-out by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game will be changed into a loss result.

  In addition, even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of date and less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, if the number of first start memories is large, the special characteristics based on these A short variation time may be set so that the variation display game in FIG. 1 fits before the end of the special variation variation game.

  For the special figure 2 variable display game, even if a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is not so disadvantageous, but in the specific game state mainly using the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. You may make it treat a game as an advantage. For example, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 117, when the fluctuation time is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game determined in the high probability state, It is determined whether the 1-variable display game has a special result and the result of the special-figure 2 variable-display game becomes the first special result. You may make it perform the process which changes so that the fluctuation time of a display game may become less than the remaining fluctuation time of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  By doing in this way, it can prevent that the 1st special result which should have been derived | led-out by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be changed into a loss result. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has the first special result, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that one of the advantageous results is derived compared with the first special result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. You may do it.

  From the above, when the first determining means (game control device 100) determines the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) in the normal state (normal game state), Determining the variation mode of the first variation display game by referring to whether or not the variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is being executed and / or variation mode information of the second variation display game. It will be possible.

  The variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and the first determination means performs the normal state (normal game) In the state), when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game, if the second variation display game is being executed, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game It is possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game with reference to the time.

  The variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game and information regarding the variation pattern corresponding to the variation time. The first determination means is included without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal state (normal game state). The first variation mode determining means (game control device 100) capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game, and the first variation mode determination means includes the variation time of the first variation display game. If the second variation display game is being executed when the variation mode information is determined, the variation mode information is determined with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. And it has a second variation mode determining means it is possible to re-determine information about variation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the first variable display games (gaming controller 100), and further comprising a.

  Further, the second variation mode determination means does not re-determine information on the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed does not result in a special result.

  The decoration variation display game execution control means (production control device 300) corresponds to the first variation display game when the state of the second variation display game at the start of the first variation display game satisfies a predetermined condition. Thus, it is possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform a special effect in the decorative variation display game that is executed.

  Further, the decoration variation display game execution control means is configured to execute the first variation display game when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game and the result of the second variation display game is out of sync. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform a special effect in a decoration variable display game that is executed corresponding to the variable display game.

  In the embodiment described above, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game. The second start memory may be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition, the normally variable prize-winning device capable of changing the state between the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and the open state in which the game ball can be easily won or won in the second start winning opening 37. You may make it provide. Then, in the specific game state in which the game is progressed mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game, it may be controlled so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device per unit time is substantially longer than that in the normal game state. .

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the game number information display part 85 and the design for an effect.

  As described above, when the progress of the game is displayed only with the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional special figure variable display game is not executed at the same time. There is a possibility that it becomes difficult for a player who is used to a gaming machine to grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, in this modification, at least during the period in which the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory is executed from the end of the special gaming state, clear information is not displayed on the game number information display unit 85. I have to.

  FIG. 177 shows the execution of the special figure variation display game and the change in the display of the game number information display unit 85, and FIGS. In the ending period (t61) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 177, notification that the specific game state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 178 (a). In this example, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 177, a special figure based on the first first start memory with the end of the first special game state. A one-variable display game is started (t62). In addition, the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation display of the effect design are also started.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 37 and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t63). In addition, the variation display of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. It should be noted that the effect design that started the variable display with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game changes while the variable display continues as shown in FIG. 178 (b) even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts. I do not.

  As shown in FIG. 177, this special figure 2 fluctuation display game is finished before the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and becomes the second special result (small hit). Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in a result form corresponding to the results of the respective games, and the effect design is the second special result. It stops in the result mode corresponding to.

  In the game so far, the special figure variation display game is executed twice, but the effect design starts at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game and stops at the stop of the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, it seems to the player that one special figure variation display game that is the second special result has been played. In this way, it becomes possible to convey the progress and contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner to a player who is used to a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time.

  Although the display on the game number information display unit 58 is started with the end of the first special gaming state (t62), here, “Preparing” is displayed to clearly display the number of remaining games and the number of executions. The preparation mode is displayed. During the period when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are likely to be executed at the same time, displaying information on the actual number of games will be cumbersome and the player will be unable to understand or distrust. Since there is a possibility of feeling a feeling, the information on the number of games is not clearly displayed here. This preparation mode display is continued until at least the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state is ended. Here, the first start memory is stored. It is (t67) until the special gaming state is finished in a state where there is no game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177, after the end of the second special game state, the second special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory is started (t65). This special figure 1 variable display game is also forcibly stopped by the result of the disparity when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result in the same manner as the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first first start memory. The second special game state is entered (t65 to t66). The same applies to the third first start memory (t66 to t67).

  The contents of display on the display device 41 during the period from t65 to t66 and t66 to t67 are the same as the display at t62 to 65 as shown in FIGS. 178 (d) and (e), for example. The information display unit 85 displays “Preparing”, and the effect design starts at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and stops in a result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game. To do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177, when the special game state is ended in the state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), the state is mainly the state where only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the number of games is consumed. Since it is the same as a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time, the game number information display unit 85 starts the RUSH display mode.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), “RUSH start” indicating that the RUSH display mode has been entered is displayed, and the number of remaining games is displayed in the game number information display section 85. However, the number of remaining games that is smaller than the actual number of remaining games is displayed. Here, although the actual number of remaining games is 43, 40 is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177, every time the special figure variation display game is executed, the remaining number of games in the game number information display section 85 is subtracted (FIG. 179 (c)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), a display for instructing to operate the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing is made. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction, the effect that the dragon flares the game number information display unit 85 is performed as an effect display as shown in FIG. 179 (e), as shown in FIG. 179 (f). An extra effect in which the value of the game number information display unit 85 is added so as to be the actual number of remaining games is provided.

  Note that the actual number of remaining games may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). Further, although the actual number of remaining games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25, a predetermined value is set such that the value of the game number information display unit 85 is less than the actual number of remaining games based on the operation of the effect button 25. A value may be added.

  In addition, the number of games to be reduced from the actual remaining number of games displayed on the game number information display unit 85 at the start of the RUSH mode is preferably equal to or greater than the upper limit number (here, 4) of the first start memory. . When the second start memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the special figure 2 variable display game, a value obtained by adding the upper limit number of the first start memory and the upper limit number of the second start memory (for example, 8) or more is preferable.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed in the RUSH display mode, the effect design is displayed as a single fluctuation display as in t62 to t65, and the number-of-games information display section The subtraction of the remaining number of games at 85 may be set to 1 so that the player can easily understand. By subtracting the number of remaining games to be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode from the actual number of remaining games, the subtraction of the remaining number of games can be made 1 in such a case. However, if the number of remaining games currently displayed matches the actual number of remaining games, the subtraction of the remaining number of games is set to 2, or the RUSH display mode is set again after a predetermined period of time as a preparation mode display. It is preferable to make a transition so that no contradiction occurs.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the game number information (effect control device 300) that can notify the game number information that is information corresponding to the subtraction result by the subtraction means (effect control device 300). And the game number information notifying means notifies the game number information at least for a period until the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special gaming state is completed. It will not be.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to perform special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing at different interrupt timings.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 180 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process, which was performed in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process, is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt process (step X801).

  Further, in the branch process (step X802) by the special figure processing counter, if the value of the special figure processing counter is an even number, the special figure 1 game process is performed (step X110), and if the value is an odd number, the special figure 2 game process (step X111). )I do. Note that 0 is treated as an even number. Thereafter, the special figure processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

  The special figure processing counter may be sequentially updated in the range of 0 to 255, may be updated alternately with 0 and 1, and may be updated with an even number of values. In addition, since the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processes are performed every time (here, 8 ms) twice the time of the timer interruption process (here, 4 ms). Will be done. Therefore, the setting of the timer value updated by these processes is performed in consideration of this.

  181 and 182 show the special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process in this modification. In these processes, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132 that were performed in the processes of FIGS. 109 and 110 are not performed.

  FIG. 183 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process in this modification. This special winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 111 except that the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501) is performed. In the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501), it is determined whether the special figure derived from either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is processed, and according to this determination result. Set the target special figure. If it is not necessary to distinguish which special figure is to be processed, the process (step Y1501) for determining the hit state of the special figure may not be performed.

  From the above, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle can be executed, and the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is executed by the first variation display game control means (game control device 100). The second variation display game control means (game control device 100) can execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the second variation display game control means can execute the second. Even if the variation display game is being executed, the first variation display game control means can execute the first variation display game, and the first variation display game control means performs a series of execution controls relating to the first variation display game. And a series of execution control related to the second variation display game by the second variation display game control means so as not to be executed simultaneously in one interrupt routine. And thus it was. As a result, the processing time can be shortened even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIGS. 99 to 101 are different, and instead of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. Based on the number of special figure 2 abnormal prizes counted based on the prize winning, the same determination as the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is performed.

  FIG. 184 shows an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is updated by +1 based on winning in the second start winning port 37 in the normal gaming state (t101, t102). When the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined value of 5, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error are based on this flag. The output of the status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, and it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation in the management device of the gaming store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice.

  Also, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches the predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started (t102), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t103), the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. In addition, when the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 newly generate | occur | produces before progress of predetermined time, the time measurement of predetermined time is newly started from that time.

  185 and 186 show an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. As shown in FIG. 185, whether the monitoring state is valid or invalid is set. When the monitoring state is valid, if there is a winning at the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning is obtained. The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

  This monitoring state is basically effective when the state is a low probability state. However, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37 with the monitoring state being valid (t113, t116), a predetermined invalid setting period (here, 10 seconds) from the winning is invalidated (t113). To t115, t116 to t117), and the winning (t114) to the second start winning opening 37 generated during the invalid setting period (t113 to t115) is not counted as an abnormal winning number. Further, it is invalidated during the first special game state. Further, the second special gaming state in the low probability state is valid because it is a short period.

  And, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not newly added over the predetermined clear period (t117 to t118, here 1800 seconds) from the end of the invalid setting period, It is supposed to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special gaming state is started.

  FIG. 186 shows the counting of the special figure 2 abnormal winnings at the end of the specific gaming state. In the case of a high probability state, since the monitoring state is invalid, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added even if the second start winning opening 37 is won. For the last special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game (t123). It remains in an invalid state until the end (t124).

  Here, since it becomes a valid state from the end of the last special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the second special result, the second special game The effective state is entered from the start of the state (t124). In this second special gaming state, the right-handed game will be continued to the right in the specific gaming state, so that a winning at the second start winning opening 37 occurs and the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is added (t125). However, since the second special gaming state ends in a short time and the invalid setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t125 to t127), In the subsequent winning at the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added (t126). Therefore, the special figure 2 abnormal winnings added according to the second special gaming state stays at 1 and is cleared after the clearing period (t127 to t128) has passed.

  In order to enable such processing, in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing of FIG. 99, instead of the processing of steps X381 to X389, winning in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the monitoring state is valid is performed. The special figure 2 abnormal prize-winning number is updated by +1 based on this. In the processing of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number.

  It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is to be performed and the length of the clear period can be arbitrarily set. The specified value and the length of the period set here may be any values as long as they can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, the special result is derived in one special figure variable display game, and the other special figure is displayed. The figure change display game is interrupted, and the special figure change display game interrupted after the special game state is ended is resumed.

  FIG. 187 shows the collective display device 50 in the gaming machine of this modification. D1 to D18 are the same as those in FIG. D19 and D20 are an interruption display section 79 indicating whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. State, Special Figure 2 Indicates either the state where the variable display game is interrupted.

  FIG. 188 shows an example in which the special figure variation display game is interrupted, and FIGS. 189 and 190 show the display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 188, the fluctuation display game b, which is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is started in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed. (T151), and thereafter, the variable display game a which is the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t152).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are in a state in which the variable display is performed. In addition, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state of being extinguished. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 188, the variable display game a ends as a result of the first special result being derived before the variable display game b (t153), and the first special gaming state is reached after a predetermined stop time has elapsed. (T154). Based on the derivation of the first special result, the variable display game b is interrupted (t153). During the interruption, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. In addition, during the interruption, the interruption display unit 79 displays that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

  As shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the variable display game a is in a state where the first special result is derived and stopped, the special result mode corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. It becomes. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 remains in a variable display. Furthermore, D20 is lit in the interruption display section 79, indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In the display device 41, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in a special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is still subjected to the variable display. Further, as shown in FIGS. 189 (c) and 190 (a), the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the interruption display unit 79 are shown in FIG. 189 (b) even in the special game state. The display mode is the same as when the result is derived.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188, when the first special game state is completed, the suspended variation display game b is resumed, and the variation time measurement is resumed (t155). Then, the fluctuation display game b is finished based on the passage of the remaining fluctuation time (t157). In addition, after the end of the first special game state, the variable display game c is newly started in the special figure 1 variable display game. The variation display game c stops before the variation display game b (t156), but since the result is out of order, the variation display game b continues without being interrupted.

  As shown in FIGS. 189 (b) and (c), with the end of the special gaming state, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 perform variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, when the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed, all are turned off to indicate that they are not interrupted.

  In this way, by suspending the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, and restarting the special figure fluctuation display game suspended after the end of the special gaming state, It becomes possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special figure variation display game. During the interruption of the special figure variation display game, an interruption signal may be output as external information, and information for determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is interrupted is output together. May be.

  In order to perform the process related to the interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. 191 is performed instead of the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 changing process, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the special figure 2 interruption flag is not executed in steps Y631 to Y639 without stopping the special figure 2 variable display game. Is saved (step Y1511).

  Also, instead of the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 135, the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 192 is performed. In the special figure 2 changing process, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 suspension flag is not executed without performing the special figure 1 variable display game stop process of steps Y661 to Y669. Is saved (step Y1512).

  In addition, the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 193 is performed instead of the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 111. In this special figure 1 game process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 suspension flag (step Y1513), and if there is no special figure 1 suspension flag (step Y1513; N), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. When the interruption is not performed, processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game after step Y103 is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 1 interrupting flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In addition, the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 194 is performed instead of the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 112. In this special figure 2 game process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 interrupting flag (step Y1514). If there is no special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514; N), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. When the interruption is not performed, processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game after step Y133 is performed. On the other hand, if there is a special figure 2 suspension flag (step Y1514; Y), that is, if the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed. The process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  Also, instead of the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 154, the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 195 is performed. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, a special figure 2 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1515). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is resumed.

  Also, instead of the special figure 2 jackpot end process shown in FIG. 155, the special figure 2 jackpot end process shown in FIG. 196 is performed. In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 1 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1517). As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is resumed.

  Further, in place of the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 159, the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 197 is performed. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, the special figure 2 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1518). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is resumed.

  Also, instead of the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 160, the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 198 is performed. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, the special figure 1 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1519). As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is resumed.

  It should be noted that in the special game state that is performed while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, a notice effect regarding the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being interrupted or the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Further, when there is a first start memory, a prefetch effect for the first start memory may be performed during the special game state.

  FIG. 199 shows an example of a pattern using different control methods depending on the situation regarding how to control the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method in which the other special figure variation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. The control method 2 is a control method in which a special result is derived in one special figure variation display game and the other special figure variation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended.

  Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 199 (a) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the special figure type. In this pattern, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ).

  In particular, when a big win is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped with the result (control method 1), so that the game is started when the high probability state is started. The game can proceed in an advantageous manner for the player. In other words, if the control method 2 is used in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game having a long variation time started at the low probability state at the start of the high probability state is resumed. It will be difficult to start the game. In the high probability state, it is a period in which the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls by shortening the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game and causing the special results to occur frequently. As a result, the start of a new special figure 2 variable display game is accelerated, and the game proceeds advantageously for the player.

  Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped (control method 1). . On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control). Method 2). Note that the control method may be selected in consideration of the special figure type.

  Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 199 (c) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the hit type. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ). The control method may be set depending on whether the first special result or the second special result is used.

  Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 199 (d) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the gaming state and the special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and stopped with the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special gaming state ends (control method 2). In the specific gaming state (during ST), the control method 2 is used regardless of the special figure type or the special result type.

  In this example, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement so that the player is disadvantaged, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game. I am doing so. In addition, for the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main player in the normal gaming state, the special result is not changed by the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is advantageous to the player, the special result will not be changed by any forced stop for any special figure fluctuation display game, and the player can maximize the profit. So that you can get In consideration of the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game that is not the main player in the specific gaming state is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from gaining excessive profits. Also good. Further, the control method may be set only by the gaming state, for example, only the control method 1 may be set in the normal gaming state and only the control method 2 may be set in the specific gaming state.

  Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 199 (e) is a pattern in which a control method is set according to the gaming state, special figure type, and special result type. In the normal gaming state, the second special result is derived in one of the special figure variation display games so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to an outlier result. Further, in the specific gaming state, the first special result is derived in one special figure variation display game, so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to the outlier result. Increase the value of special results.

  The pattern of the control method is not limited to those described here, and other patterns may be used. In addition, as the control method selection parameters, the special figure type, the special result type, the gaming state, and the like are described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other parameters may be considered. Examples of other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special gaming state, calendar information such as date, day of the week, and current time, and achievement of certain conditions in the game such as occurrence of outlier reach a predetermined number of times.

  When selecting the control method as shown in FIG. 199, when the special figure 2 is also being executed in the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. 191 (step Y630; Y), according to the conditions. A process of selecting whether to interrupt or end is performed. If the interruption is selected, the special figure 2 interruption flag is saved (step Y1511), and the processes after step Y640 are executed. If the end is selected, the special figure 2 variable display game stop process at steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 134 is performed, and the processes after step Y640 are performed.

  Further, in the special-figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 192, when special-figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), a process of selecting whether to interrupt or end depending on the condition is performed. To. If the interruption is selected, the special figure 1 interruption flag is saved (step Y1512), and the processes after step Y670 are executed. If the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 135 is performed, and the processes after step Y670 are performed.

  In other words, after the game control device 100 ends the one variation display game as a result other than the special result and interrupts one variation display game and ends the special game state based on the other variation display game. Selection means is provided for selecting and executing either of the resumption control for resuming one of the suspended variation display games based on a predetermined condition.

  From the above, one of the fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) and the second fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) is changed by one fluctuation display game execution control means. When execution control of a display game (special figure fluctuation display game) is performed, when the other fluctuation display game whose execution control is performed by the other fluctuation display game execution control means has a special result, Control for ending the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and one variable display game that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was terminated Selection means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing either of the restart control for restarting the game based on a predetermined condition.

  The selection means is controlled by the second variation display game execution control means when execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed by the first variation display game execution control means. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) in which the game is performed has a special result, after the first variation display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the second variation display game is ended When the second variation display game execution control unit performs execution control of the second variation display game, the first variation display game is resumed by selecting and executing the resumption control for resuming the first variation display game that has been interrupted. When the first variation display game whose execution control is being performed by the game execution control means has a special result, an end control for ending the second variation display game as a result other than the special result is selected and executed. The it has to so that.

  The selection means selects and executes an end control for ending one of the variable display games as a result other than the special result when the other variable display game has a first special result, and executes the other variable display game. When the game results in the second special result, the resumption control for resuming one of the variable display games after interrupting one of the variable display games and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game. Will be selected and executed.

  In addition, when the selection means is in the specific gaming state, the execution control is performed by the first variation display game execution control means when the second variation display game execution control means performs execution control of the second variation display game. The second variation that was interrupted after the second variation display game was interrupted and the special gaming state based on the first variation display game was terminated when the first variation display game in which the game is performed has a special result This means that the resumption control for resuming the display game is selected and executed.

  In addition, the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the first variation display game and the second variation display game. For each of these, measurement means (game control device 100) that starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game and ends the variation time measurement of the variation display game when the variation time has elapsed. And the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means end the variation display of the variation display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variation time. When the restart control is selected by the selection unit, the measurement unit is configured so that the one variation display game is based on the fact that the other variation display game has a special result. Of interrupting the measurement of the variation time, so that the special game state based on the other of the variable display games so as to resume the measurement of the variation time of one variation display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display method and configuration of the collective display device 50 are different.

  FIG. 200 shows a display method at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), when the variation display of the next special-figure variation display game is started from the state in which the previous special-figure variation display game is displayed and the result mode of the special result is displayed, Start from the state. In this way, it will be immediately apparent that the change has started. In addition, during the fluctuation, the symbols that are completely off and repeated are repeated. However, as shown in FIG. 200B, the symbols that are not used as a result mode may be repeated. In any case, it will be immediately apparent that the change has started regardless of where it starts. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured such that the symbols that are off, the symbols that are initially lit at the start of variation, the symbols that are displayed during variation display, and the like are different.

  FIG. 201 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged in a straight line. In addition to this, the LEDs q to t functioning as the memory display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the LEDs u having the functions of the round display unit 60, the first game state display unit 77 and the probability display unit 78. -X are provided. Other functions may be assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (b), in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the LED a and b are turned on to form a shifted symbol, and during the variable display, this broken symbol and all the lights are repeatedly turned off. Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (c), in the special figure 2 display 52, by turning on only LEDi, a shift symbol is formed, and during the variable display, this shift symbol and all extinction are repeated. In this way, the outlier symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game and the outlier symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game are different.

  Further, the display mode during the variable display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 configured as described above may be a display mode other than those described above. For example, one or a plurality of LEDs blink or alternate. It is also possible to turn on and off the LEDs adjacent to each other so that the light flows along the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end, by repeating the lighting, the off-symbol design, and all lighting. As shown in FIG. 202, the number of LEDs may be different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this case, the time for light to flow from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end may be controlled to be the same in any special-purpose display. That is, the special figure 2 display 52 having a larger number of LEDs than the special figure 1 display 51 may increase the speed of light flow. Of course, the speed at which light flows may be the same. Also, the off-symbol design or the changing design may be different.

  When the number of LEDs is different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special display 2 shown in FIG. 2, it is possible to set more result forms for the larger special figure. That is, when there are a plurality of small hits due to different opening modes as in this embodiment, right-handed to the extent that it is not determined to be fraudulent in the normal state, and the game ball is awarded to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37, It is highly conceivable that an illegal act of aiming at the first special variable prize-winning device 38 is performed when a result mode corresponding to the long open is observed by looking at the LED of the special figure 2 display 52 after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. On the other hand, for example, if the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 display 52 is increased, more small hit result modes can be set, and the player can easily recognize the long open result mode. The above-described fraud can be prevented.

  FIG. 203 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes LEDs a to y and z1 to z4. A covering member 95 made of a seal or a plate material is attached to the front surface so as to cover the front surface of the collective display device 50. In this covering member 95, the portions of LEDs a to y which are portions used during the game are transparent, and it can be seen that the LEDs are present at first glance. It should be noted that it is understood that the LED exists at first glance, and may be translucent or hollowed out in addition to being transparent.

  In addition, the covering member 95 has a display indicating the function of the LED adjacent to a necessary portion among the portions where the presence of the LED can be understood at first glance. For example, the LEDu forming the round display portion 60 is displayed. The number of rounds notified when each lights up is displayed at positions adjacent to .about.x.

  The LEDs z <b> 1 to z <b> 4 that are not used during the game are hidden by the covering member 95 so that it cannot be understood at first glance that the LEDs exist. The LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as a function of the gaming machine. However, if there is an inconvenience due to the presence of LEDs that are not used, for example, they are used as LEDs for informing the RAM initialization, and the portions covering the LEDs z1 to z4 of the covering member 95 are at first glance when the LEDs are off. It is assumed to be semi-transparent so that the lighting state can be confirmed.

  By using the collective display device 50 and the covering member 95, the function of each LED and the configuration of the covering member 95 are set according to the model, so that the collective display device 50 can be used in common even for different models. Can be used.

  FIG. 204 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the arrangement of LEDs of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is different.

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the number of the LED to be lit for the result mode and the changing pattern is common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the display has a different shape on the display. can do. For example, FIG. 204A shows a state in which a shifted symbol is displayed on both the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this off-set design, the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in any special display, but because the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the display has a different shape. As a result, even if the graphic data common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is used, it can be displayed in a different shape on the display, and various symbols are expressed using the common data. be able to.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows the display during fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51. In the display during fluctuation, all the lights are turned off and a predetermined LED is turned on repeatedly. Here, before the reach occurs (during the first half of the fluctuation), all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 6 and 7 are turned on repeatedly, and during the N reach, the lights are turned off and the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on repeatedly. During SP1 reach, all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are turned on repeatedly. During SP2 reach, the lights are turned off and the LEDs 4 and 8 are turned on repeatedly. In this way, various lighting effects can be performed by changing the lighting location according to the variation pattern.

  For example, in the case of SP1 reach, a display mode in which all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are turned on before the occurrence of the reach may be used, and the occurrence of the reach may be notified in advance on the special display. Further, a lighting mode for suggesting or definitively reporting the occurrence of a big hit may be provided as the lighting mode during fluctuation, and the occurrence of the big hit may be suggested or reported on a special figure display.

  FIG. 205 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 is composed of LEDs arranged in an annular shape, and displays light so that it circulates during fluctuation display. And the display of a result aspect is performed by lighting one or some LED. Of course, the special figure 2 display 52 has the same configuration. Further, the special figure display may form some design, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 205 (b), a mushroom shape is formed.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the content of the game is different.

  As shown in FIG. 206, in this modification, there are four gaming states of a low probability disadvantage mode M1, a high probability disadvantage mode M2, a high probability advantage mode M3, and a low probability advantage mode M4. These gaming states are transitioned. Here, in the name of each gaming state, low probability means a low probability state, and high probability means a high probability state. Also, the disadvantage is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which a long fluctuation (about 10 minutes) with a very long fluctuation time is set, so that the probability of hitting is low and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is disadvantageous for the player. This means that the game is progressing mainly. Further, advantageous means that the long game is not set in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game is advanced mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game that has a high probability of hitting and is advantageous to the player. .

  The low probability disadvantage mode M1 is a gaming state corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the high probability advantageous mode M3 is a gaming state corresponding to the specific gaming state. The high probability disadvantage mode M2 is a so-called latent state, and is an effect state in which it is not possible to clearly determine whether the player is in the low probability disadvantage mode M1 or the high probability disadvantage mode M2. This effect state is also set when 2R normal or small hit is won in the low probability disadvantage mode M1. The low probability advantageous mode M4 is similar to the time-short state in the conventional gaming machine. In this game state, the game is progressed mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game, so that it is possible to wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of held balls due to the high occurrence of the small hit.

  Further, the hit types in the special drawings 1 and 2 are as shown in FIG. Of these, the probable jackpot is a jackpot that is in a high probability state until the special game state display game is executed 50 times after the end of the special game state, and the normal jackpot is a jackpot that is in a low probability state after the end of the special game state. It is.

  In addition, the number of winning balls obtained by small hits and the variation time may be adjusted so that the number of balls held tends to increase in the low probability advantageous mode M4. Since this low probability advantage mode M4 continues until the next big hit, it can be continued for a long period of time, and a game mode in which the number of possessed balls gradually increases during this time can be obtained, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a special game state in a short time. The game can be different. Furthermore, the right-handed game is configured such that the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 can both be won, and the special figure 1 variable display game that is normally a big hit in the low probability advantageous mode M4 has been started. In this case, a special result may be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game to prevent the normal big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a notification that prompts to maintain the low probability advantageous mode M4 may be issued.

  As described above, in the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, the rendering control device 300 sets the rendering according to the gaming state. However, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses information on the gaming state, and thus cannot perform an appropriate production. In order to minimize inconvenience due to such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information related to the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

  The game control device 100 sends the probability information command shown in FIG. 207 including the game state information to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state and the start of the special figure variable display game when the game state is switched. Send. As shown in FIG. 207 (b), a command of A801h which is a probability information command indicating a low probability disadvantage at the start (t171) of the special figure variable display game when the gaming state is a low probability disadvantage. Is transmitted to the production control device 300. Also, at the start of the special gaming state that occurs when the probability is low (t172), a command A801h that is a probability information command indicating that the probability is low is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Here, since the result is a probable big hit, the gaming state shifts to a highly probable advantage when the special gaming state ends. Along with this, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly probable, is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t173). The production control device 300 performs a highly advantageous production based on the reception of this command.

  Then, at the start of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is highly advantageous (t174, t175), a command of A802h which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly advantageous is sent to the effect control device 300. Send. After this, the power source of the effect control device 300 is shut off for some reason (t176), and the display device 41 is not displayed (black display). During this time, the game is progressing in the game control device 100, but the decoration special figure variation display game or the like on the display device 41 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays the restored image on the display device 41 until a command is received from the game control device 100 (t177 to t178). When the A802h command, which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly advantageous with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, is received from the game control device 100, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started with a highly accurate effect. (T178). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the gaming state change.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed for the customer waiting command shown in FIG. 208 (a) including the game state information. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a certain waiting time is set. As shown in FIG. 208 (b), here, the power source of the effect control device 300 is shut off for some reason (t181), and then the power source of the effect control device 300 is restored and the effect control device 300 is activated ( t182).

  If the special figure variation display game is started after the production control device 300 is restored, the probability information command including the game state information is transmitted as described above, so that it is possible to return to the production according to the game state. The waiting state is set so that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (t184).

  The game control device 100 transmits a command of 8002h which is a customer waiting command indicating that it is highly advantageous at the time of customer waiting setting, and the production control device 300 is highly advantageous based on the information of the customer waiting command. The production is set and the customer waits. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the gaming state change.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. In particular, it is possible to apply a screen shot function and a setting function for demonstration of waiting for a customer. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 1st starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
37 Ordinary Fluctuation Prize Winner (Starting Prize Winner)
38 Special variable prize device (variable prize device)
97 Second start prize opening (start prize opening)
100 Game control device (control means, start-up storage means, prior determination means, game execution control means, specific game state generation means)
300 effect control device (control means, prior effect control means)

Claims (2)

When a special result is derived as a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state that can be converted to give a player a gaming value,
The control means includes
Starting memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on a winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the result of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start storage means;
Game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means;
Based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination unit, a pre-production control unit capable of performing a predetermined production;
A specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the variable display game is executed to be advantageous to the player over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state;
With
The special result includes a first special result capable of generating a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state capable of generating a second special gaming state having a gaming value lower than that of the first special gaming state. With special results,
The specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game in the specific game state is the first special result than the normal state,
The pre-production control means is
When the second special gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform the predetermined effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means in the generated second special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by The start prize opening includes a first start prize opening and a second start prize opening,
A first start storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A second starting storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, and storing the predetermined random number as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number;
2. The second special result can be derived even in the variable display game based on the start memory stored by either the first start memory means or the second start memory means. The gaming machine described in 1.